Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

and residential. hence. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In this case. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. sections. the hierarchy of elements. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. and open Metric\Templates. 12 Select DefaultMetric. You learn the terminology. As you work in drawing and schedule views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. If you move the partition. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. the floor or roof remains connected. you will use the default template. and plans. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. construction. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction .10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. In the Revit Architecture model. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. schedules. quantities. how to navigate the user interface. and click Open. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and schedules required for a building project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and customize the project as necessary. scope. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In this case. drawing sheets. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. review the Revit Architecture templates. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. click Training Files. the parameter is one of association or connection. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. 13 Click OK. For most tutorial projects. the door retains this relationship to the partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and phases when you need it. drawings. the operation of the software is parametric. every drawing sheet. 2D and 3D view.rte.

without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. tags. For example. programming is not required. filled regions. For example. and 2D detail components. windows. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. walls and roofs are hosts. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. doors. They help to describe or document the model. doors. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. They display in relevant views of the model. dimensions. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. dimensions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and keynotes are annotation elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. If you can draw. grids. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Examples include detail lines. levels. Datum elements help to define project context. tags. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. Understanding the Basics | 7 . The second is its approach to propagating building changes. walls. windows. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building.When you change something. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. and roofs are model elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and cabinets are model components.

top of wall. first floor. families. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Often. from geometry to construction data. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. such as roofs. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. To place levels. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. By using a single project file. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you can explicitly control them. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. for example. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. and so forth). However. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.In Revit Architecture. The project file contains all information for the building design. for example. Most often. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . elevation views. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. and ceilings. section views. you must be in a section or elevation view. Project: In Revit Architecture. views of the project. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. schedules. In other cases. or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. floors. and drawings of the design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. and types. This information includes components used to design the model.

For example. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. For example. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. In the steps that follow. and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. categories of model elements include walls and beams. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. roofs. A type can be a specific size of a family. making it easy to understand what each button represents.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. However. In the following illustration. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. System families include walls. ceilings. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. System families can be transferred between projects. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. and similar graphical representation. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. dimensions. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. A type can also be a style. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). floors. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. identical use. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. the user interface is labeled. For example. specifically its clear user interface.

In addition. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. This creates a new project based on the default template. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. click (New).Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. By default. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.

There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. and View. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Edit.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. which are listed on the menu. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. While working in the drawing area. you type the required key combination to perform the command. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. For example.

the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. On the left side of the Options Bar. when you add a door. 9 In the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. When you select the Door tool.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. For example. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . a door type is specified. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors.

immediately below the Type Selector. containing buttons grouped by function. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. In the drawing area. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog displays.

select Views (all).11 Click OK. click the tab in the Design Bar. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the Project Browser. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab.

and rename views. and group name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. schedules.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. walls. families. The browser is dockable. family category (doors. windows). double-click its name. To open a view. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and groups. elevations. reports. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . families. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. delete. 3D). sheets. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector.

15 In the Browser Organization dialog. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. click Cancel. After creating a browser organization scheme. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In this case. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Wall. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. In the bottom left corner of the window. Do not click. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The cursor displays as a pencil.

find a keyword on the Index tab. You can also press SHIFT+F1. 20 Press TAB. It highlights when the cursor is over it. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Windows: From any window. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. Click the Help button. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. click on the Standard toolbar. click Modify to end the Wall command. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. There are several tools that help you find information. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. Toolbar: From the toolbar. If no Help button displays. In addition. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . press F1 for context-sensitive help. In the status bar. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. regarding selected elements in a view. You can use this tri-pane. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. press F1 for help.18 On the Design Bar. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. The status bar also provides information. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. in conjunction with tooltips. When you place the cursor over an element. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. After you are familiar with these tasks. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5.

you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example. In the following steps. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the view zooms out from the building model. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. There are several ways to access zoom options.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. In the drawing area. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.rvt. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).

11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. on the View toolbar. . The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 10 To display SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. When you release the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. As you move the mouse. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 7 Click in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . the view zooms in on the selected area. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. If you do not have a wheel mouse.

bottoms. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. and then using the Zoom tool again. expand Views (all). as shown. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select the wall. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. 15 To exit the wheel. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. For more information about SteeringWheels. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2nd Flr.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Similar controls. expand Floor Plans. Cnst. referred to as shape handles. When drawing or modifying a building model. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and click Help. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Small blue dots. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. called drag controls. 17 Type ZR. press ESC. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. These are the drag controls. display along the ends.

require 2 clicks to complete the command. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. click to specify the starting position. to lengthen the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. After selecting the element to move. you want to move the table closer to the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . click (Move). 23 Click next to the lower wall. The table moves down. as shown. for example. In this case. such as Move and Copy. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and on the Tools toolbar. Some commands. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint.18 Click and drag the left control.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. such as the Lines command. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. select the second item in the list. and drag it on top of the table. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 26 On the Undo menu. and click again to end it. click Lines. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Some commands. on the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. or press CTRL+Z. 24 Select the plant. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. Move. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.

use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . Press ESC twice. click Modify. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. On the Design Bar.29 To end the command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. this tutorial uses imperial units only. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. but for training purposes. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. In this tutorial. and annotate building assemblies. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. In Revit Architecture. When you have finished these tutorials. 27 . Use keynotes to annotate a detail. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. or referenced as a drafting view. detail. Use detail components to define an assembly. illustrating how building components work together. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file.

verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 2 In the Drafting View dialog. click Training Files. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. create a reference callout. and click OK. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. for Name.rvt. click Drafting View. you will create a drafting view. If necessary. enter Window Head Detail. 3 In the Scale list. import a DWG detail. scroll until the folder is displayed.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. and reference a drafting view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1.dwg. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.). The model zooms out. click Training Files. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 9 Type ZR. 6 In the Colors field list. 10 In the drawing area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. as shown.In the Project Browser. The drawing area is still blank. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. select Black and White. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. displaying the extents of the detail. located directly to the left of the drawing area. and click Open. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 .

select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. in the Type Selector.The view displays to the specified area. and in the Scale list. select Detail View: Detail. 14 In the drawing area. to activate the view selection list. 13 Click Reference other view. click Callout. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 12 On the Options Bar. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . select Callout.rvt. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. in the Type Selector. 2 On the Options Bar. c_express_workshop_details_start. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 3 In the drawing area. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. adjust the detail view display settings. and in the Scale list. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. double-click the reference callout tag head. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view.The reference callout is created.

double-click Wall Base 1. click Modify to clear the selection. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. for Name. 6 In the drawing area. under Detail Views(Detail). and click Rename.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Rename View dialog. enter Wall Base 1. 4 Right-click Detail 0. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips.

11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. This is the view crop region. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . bordered by a solid line.

select As Underlay. right-click. under Graphics. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 16 Click OK. and click View Properties. click (Hide Crop Region). 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the drawing area. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Display Model.

21 Move the cursor up slightly. 20 In the drawing area. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. If the crop region is enlarged. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior .Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. By grouping detail components. Directly above the drawing area. type 1' 6''. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. 19 In the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. typical details can easily be placed.Brick on Mtl. 17 On the View Control Bar. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. click Detail Components. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. on the Options Bar. Stud.

click Modify to end the command. add the following detail components as shown. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method. and click Create Instance. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 25 In the Project Browser.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components.

■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.28 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

map keynotes by material. click Browse. click Keynote ➤ Element. special notes. and verify that Horizontal. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Leader. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 4 On the Options Bar. in the type selector. and Free End are selected. c_express_workshop_details_start. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. In the next exercise. and format keynote styles. For more information about customizing a keynote database.txt.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. You can customize this list. and under Keynote Table. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. or instructions within a construction documentation package. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. for Full Path.rvt. click Training Files.

5 In the drawing area. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 8 Click to place the tag.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. a question mark displays. Keynoting | 39 . 9 Press ESC to end the command. If no value has been specified. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. Either move the text inside. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.

13 Click to place the tag. and click OK. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 15 Select 07 21 00. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Material. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information.All items within the selection display in red. legends. Click Check None. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Click OK. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Only the keynotes remain selected. 17 On the Options Bar. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Select Keynote Tags. Creating Details with Revit Architecture.Boxed. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. 19 In the Type Selector.

NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. update the project information element properties. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . but for training purposes. Place views on drawing sheets. Add labels to a title block. Update drawing sheet and project information. In this exercise. you will create a sheet. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. and modify and update the project sheet title block. In this lesson. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet.

In the Project Browser. or in the element properties of the title block. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. If necessary. 3 Click OK.rvt. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. In Revit Architecture.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

9 In the Project Browser. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 7 Enter K. click Modify to clear the selection. Then.4 Type ZR. In this tutorial. Click OK. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. under Sheets(all). or in the project information Element Properties dialog. Smith and press ENTER. roll the wheel. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 5 In the drawing area. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. hold down the wheel and drag. To zoom in and out. To pan. 6 In the Title Block. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. and click Rename. enter Sections/Details. double-click Checker. For Name. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block.Unnamed. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. enter A602. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. right-click A602 .

The Family Editor opens. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter Design Development. Smith. 16 Type ZR. click Text. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. 13 Click OK. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . For Project Status.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 18 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Options Bar. select the title block. select Text : 1/8''. For Client Name. in the Type Selector. enter J. 20 Click and type Project Status. For Project Name. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. enter 4/10/2008. (Left) is selected. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. enter Freighthouse Flats. 17 On the Design Bar.

select Label : 3/16''. and click OK. as shown. click Label. and verify that (Top) are selected. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. and click. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. 23 On the Design Bar. to add 28 Using the same method. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Category Parameters. add Project Issue Date parameter.21 On the Design Bar. 22 Using the same method. as shown. click (Load into Project). click Modify to exit the command. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status.

and under Keynote Table. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. representing the view or schedule. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. you will create. select Override parameter values of existing types. place and modify a keynote legend. click Training Files. In this exercise. click Browse.30 In the Reload Family dialog. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.Project. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. and click Yes.txt. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . for Name. to a drawing sheet. for Full Path. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. Next you will create. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Keynote Legend . by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. a viewport displays. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet.

TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. under Text. under Sheets (all).Sections/Details. and click OK. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and drag Keynote Legend . Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. on the Appearance tab. as shown.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. clear Show Headers. expand Legends. double-click A601 .Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 8 In the Project Browser. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area.

The keynote legend is visible. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.Project as shown. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.

right-click Keynote Legend . and click OK. at the bottom of the Filter tab. as shown. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 19 Click OK twice. The Keynote Legend is now blank. 15 In the Project Browser. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. enter Keynote Legend . NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. and click OK. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. for Filter. not keynotes. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties.Sheet. expand Detail Views (Detail). 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Filter by sheet. for View Name. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. click Edit.Project. under Legends.

you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. as shown. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser.The keynote legend is automatically updated. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. The view remains selected. and then add and update a Drawing list. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.Title Sheet 1. 2 In the Project Browser. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. The view title with line displays below the viewport. double-click A0 .

and zoom in on the drawing list. as shown. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture displays a view title. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. 6 Type ZR. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. 5 In the Project Browser. or omit view titles from sheets. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . define the information to include in a view title. As part of a construction document set. You can specify text attributes for view titles. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list.When you place a view on a sheet. The drawing list remains selected. by default. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. Press ESC to clear the selection. 3 In the Type Selector. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed.

under Identity Data. including only sheets that contain views. under Sheets (all). select A602 .Sections/Details and select A801 . while pressing SHIFT. clear Appears In Drawing List. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. right-click the selected sheets. and click Properties. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 .Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. The drawing list display is updated.Ceiling Plans.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. As you develop the building design. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a central service core. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. For example. a curtain wall. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. 57 . As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. it is good practice to test the constraints. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. After the beginning exercises. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. If the grid moves.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009.

you load any required family type that is not in your project. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. South. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. In the drawing area in the right pane. locate the Project Browser. For this project. Creating the Project In this exercise. notice four elevation markers. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and residential. you design inside the elevation markers. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. West. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. East. under Projects. levels. In practice. from the product library. views. select Project. verify that the second option is selected. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. but contains no geometry. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as a door or window. 5 Click OK. with an RVT extension. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. you use a template that is provided with the software. click New. click Training Files. To create the project file. construction. you will use the default template. and click Browse.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. In views that display elevation markers. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The new project opens.rte. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. under Create new. 3 Under Template file. and customize the project as necessary. The project is stored as a single file. and settings.

The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. Sheets (all). reflected ceiling plan views. and duplicate levels. NOTE If you create a project without a template. and families in your project. As you design and document your building model. as well as change their names. 15 For Save as type. heights. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. 16 Click Save. enter Revit Retail Building. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. duplicate them. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and on the General tab. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Ceiling Plans. view the Save reminder interval. and delete them. Creating the Project | 59 . will be accessible from the Project Browser. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. expand Views (all). Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. the view you see in the drawing area. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. 7 If necessary.rvt) is selected. double-click South. and other properties. and click Training Files. created by the template. sheets. delete.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. change their properties. Families. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. 14 For File name.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. such as schedules and legends. notice the Legends. These views are customizable: you can rename them. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. you will want to save your work frequently. double-click Metric. then expand Floor Plans. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). verify that Project Files (*. Groups. display in the south elevation. Schedules/Quantities. 13 In the file window. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. schedules. and elevation views created in the project by the template. You can add. 8 Under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. content and building model reports. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). Two level lines.

so that when one level moves. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). After you modify the two default levels. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. Adding Project Levels on page 60. You learn how the levels are locked. expand Views (all). doors. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. the other levels move and change with it. and double-click South. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line.17 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 00 Foundation. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. and windows within the building model. or constrained. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. You change the names of the 2 default levels. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. to each other. and press ENTER. When you begin designing. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building.

When you add the new level. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. not all the tabs are visible. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. Next. and press ENTER. 16 Enter 3750. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. enter -1800. As you move the cursor. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. and click OK. enter 01 Entry Level. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and then move it up. By default. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. and press ESC. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. Adding Project Levels | 61 . This is the Options Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. If it does not. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 13 On the Options Bar. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 14 Click Plan View Types. and click Basics. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. enter 0. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. which should display by default. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. click Level. view the Design Bar. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. and press ENTER. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 5 In the Project Browser. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. right-click.

right-click Level 3. 19 Click OK. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 26 Press ESC. enter 3750. click (Pick Lines). If you create a level by copying it.18 In the Project Browser. click Rename. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. and move it slightly upward. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. and for Offset. using a different option. and rename the corresponding views. click Level. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. click Modify to end the command. Next. 21 In the Project Browser. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. or on the Design Bar. 25 Click to place the level line. you add another level. 23 On the Options Bar. and enter 02 Level. under Floor Plans.

The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. all the levels move. Adding Project Levels | 63 . 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Notice that by moving the top level. and you can move them independently. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. If you select a level and click its lock. as shown. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. the levels are no longer constrained.

under Floor Plans. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. click Modify. select (Draw). click Grid. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you constrain the column heights to the roof level. In the following exercise. In a later exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. On the Design Bar. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. specify a start point for the grid line. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Move the cursor up. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. the column height changes as well. When the grid is complete. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. so that if the roof elevation changes. and specify the grid line endpoint.

■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 7500 mm. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. and press ENTER. On the Options Bar. enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Enter A. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Click to place the grid line. Next. for Offset. and click to place the line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and for Offset. enter 4500 mm. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. click Grid. and click to place the line.

■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. On the Options Bar. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar.8 Press ESC. click Grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. 11 On the Design Bar. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click Grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. as shown. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid.

click Dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select grid lines C and 3. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 21 Press ESC twice. click (Aligned). 18 On the Design Bar. 15 Starting with grid line A. click Dimension. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 14 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. and press ESC. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Modify. enter 50mm. and press ESC. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click and drag the blue circular grip up. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. click Edit/New. By pinning these central grid lines. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. until it is closer to grid line 5. 33 On the Design Bar. select grid line 5. The pins are hidden. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 29 In the Name dialog. and select None. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 31 For End Segments Length. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click the value for Center Segment. 26 In the drawing area. 32 Click OK twice. click Duplicate.5mm Bubble with Gap. 24 Press ESC. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. click . (Element Properties). and select grid line A. Two pins display on the grid lines.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. If necessary. At the left endpoint of the grid line. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. until it is closer to grid line A. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. enter 6. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line.

select all of the grid lines. and on the Options Bar.5mm Bubble with Gap. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC. 36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 69 .34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). click Modify. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click Finish. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. click (Grid Intersection). 39 In the Type Selector. and in the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. select Grid : 6. The original continuous grid lines are restored. 35 In the Type Selector. For Place By. click Structural Column. select Grid : 6.5mm Bubble. 37 Select the grid lines again.

click Camera. select 01 Entry Level. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 45 While pressing CTRL. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. and unlock it. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. If it is unlocked. and press ENTER. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 43 Press ESC. for From. lock it. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. under Floor Plans. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. click Activate Dimensions. 52 On the Options Bar. select grid line A. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 47 Enter 9000. 46 On the Options Bar. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. Next.

and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.

Right-click 3D View 1. displays in bold under 3D Views. In the Rename View dialog. When you finish adding beams. Adding Beams on page 72.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. named 3D View 1 by default. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. under Views (all). you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. expand 3D Views. enter To Building. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. and click OK. The current view. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Beams In this exercise.

The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. The selected grid lines display as red. 10 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Medium. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 8 While pressing CTRL. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 7 On the Options Bar. click (Create Beam On Grid). under 3D Views. the icon on the right side of the scale. select each grid line. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. click Beam. under Floor Plans.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options Bar. click Finish. view the icons on the View Control Bar. Adding Beams | 73 . double-click 01 Entry Level. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . The view is currently set to Coarse.

The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. select 02 Level. press and hold SHIFT. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. under Floor Plans. and click OK. click Modify. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. right-click. and click Select All Instances. double-click 01 Entry Level. 14 Select one of the beams. click (Default 3D View). Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. select 06 Roof. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 12 On the View toolbar. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 13 On the Design Bar.

under 3D Views. 25 In the Project Browser. click 24 Press ESC. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. When you created the columns. and click Select All Instances. and click Element Properties. select 06 Roof. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 21 With the column selected. under Instance Parameters. right-click. double-click To Building. All of the columns display as red. resize the view to see the entire structure.to the 5th level. Adding Beams | 75 . for Top Level. 22 On the Options Bar. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. under Constraints. right-click. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. and click OK. and if necessary. 06 Roof. view the Top Level parameter. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties). 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click Cancel.

under Elevations.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. but you want to display them in less detail. as lines only. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. double-click South. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 28 Save the drawing. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines.

and press ESC to end the command. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. under Floor Plans.29 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces | 77 . click Framing Elevation. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces on page 77. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. To better add the braces to the structure. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure.

so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 7 On the Design Bar. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. and when the endpoint snap displays. 8 In the Type Selector. click to specify the start point of the brace. After you add the final brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 11 Using the same technique. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. The associated framing elevation view displays. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. but when placed the braces are placed. click Brace. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary).Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. double-click the elevation marker arrow. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. press ESC twice.

IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. and press ENTER. delete it and redraw it. Adding Braces | 79 .Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. The height of the roof lowers. enter 18000 mm.

but this time add them from right to left. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. enter 10000 mm. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. double-click 00 Foundation. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. 14 On the Standard toolbar. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and on the Options Bar. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 21 Select grid line A. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. under Floor Plans. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. 19 In the Project Browser. click Activate Dimensions. Adding Braces | 81 . and click the lock that displays to unlock it. enter 12000 mm. and press ENTER. as shown in the 3D view below. NOTE As you add braces.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. double-click 00 Foundation. 23 In the Project Browser.

beams. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. double-click South. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 In the Project Browser. Test connectivity of the columns. and drag it away from the structure.24 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. lock it. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. double-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Project Browser. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. click and roof height. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. Creating a Foundation on page 82. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 31 Save the drawing. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . grid size. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. double-click 00 Foundation. under Elevations. and if necessary. under 3D Views. 28 On the Standard toolbar.

click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. The foundation pile cap now displays. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. click Edit. and press ESC twice. and click View Properties. for View Range. under View Depth. A warning displays. under Extents. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. double-click 00 Foundation. click Training Files. The pile cap has been added in the view. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and drag it to the drawing area. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Creating a Foundation | 83 . The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree.rfa. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. for Level. 9 Close the warning dialog. select Unlimited. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. under Floor Plans. Click OK twice. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser.Before you can add the pile caps. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. After you load the pile cap family. and expand Structural Foundations. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families. and how to load specific families into a project. In the View Range dialog. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser.

12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. When the final pile cap is placed. and click Create Similar. press ESC twice.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

2 Select one of the columns. and braces that you used to create the building structure. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. beam. click Training Files. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. right-click. and click Select All Instances. double-click {3D}. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. and brace families into the project. You load new column. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. you change the types of the columns. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. under 3D Views. beams. All columns in the building model display as red.

you change the brace type. but it is the only size of its type currently available. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 18 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 10 On the Options Bar. for Type. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Brace. 19 On the Design Bar.6X15. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). under Dimensions. enter 75mm. and click OK twice. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 6 In the Type Selector. the braces as well as the beams change. click (Default 3D View).9. right-click. 16 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. This not the size that you want to use. and click Select All Instances. 17 While pressing CTRL. and changing its size parameter. click Modify. The brace type changes. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the braces in the elevation one by one. 9 In the Type Selector. In the following steps. click Modify. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. enter 75mm.2X101. 15 In the Project Browser.3 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. click Modify. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams.5CHS. 13 In the Name dialog. for d. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. The building model displays the round hollow columns. double-click Elevation 1-a. and click OK.

the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. and click Open. select Auto . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. select m_RRB_structure_complete.Origin to Origin. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. 3 Under Positioning. click Training Files. After the files are linked.

6 In the drawing area. In this case. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. click Copy. under Elevations. 5 On the Tools toolbar. click (Copy/Monitor). select Levels 00 through 06. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. double-click South. while pressing CTRL. and click Select Link. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. depending on the project. structural members. 9 In the drawing area. select the linked Revit model. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . however. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. and walls could also be copy/monitored. select Multiple. Grids. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. 8 On the Options Bar.4 In the Project Browser. After the link is established. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects.

click Finish mode. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). The 06 Roof floor plan opens. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Delete. for Floor Plan views. while pressing SHIFT. right-click Level 1. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Finish. delete the Level 2 floor plan. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display.10 On the Options Bar. click OK. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. 16 Click OK. 18 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. First.

select the Topography : Surface. click OK. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. for Name. 25 In the View Templates dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 20 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. and click OK. 26 In the Project Browser.19 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. right-click. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 21 In the drawing area.

Linking the Structural Model | 91 . click Camera. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. and click OK. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. 34 In the 3D view that displays. under Names. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. select Floor Plans.

enter To Building. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. Some other Revit Architecture elements. right-click 3D View 1. Adding Floors on page 92.35 In the Project Browser. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. and railings are also created from sketches. 36 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. stairs. such as roofs. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. expand 3D Views. To create floors. Adding Floors In this exercise. In this exercise. click Training Files. and click Rename. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt.

Move the cursor to the left. click (Rectangle).Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 93 . click Dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. double-click 01 Entry Level. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. and elements in the current view display as gray. Do not lock the dimension. Leave this dimension unlocked. If the grid changes size. past the first vertical grid line. click Floor. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. and then the first horizontal grid line. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. select the top floor line. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. under Floor Plans. You are now in the Sketch Editor. On the Sketch tab. At the top left corner of the grid. click Lines. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

Enter 300. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and then press ESC. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. select the top floor line. They display on the floor sketch. press ENTER. At the top left corner of the grid. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Select and lock the dimensions. Do not lock the dimensions. and change their values to 300 mm. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. click Modify. and click the temporary dimension value. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Next. click Edit. The 02 Level floor sketch displays.8 Select the floor. On the Options Bar. and press ESC. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. and lock the dimensions. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. on the Design Bar. click Quit Sketch. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. On the Sketch tab. and for Offset. using a different sketching technique. click Floor. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Adding Floors | 95 . under Floor Plans. enter 1500mm. click (Pick Lines). ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and on the Options Bar. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. Select the three remaining floor lines. double-click 02 Level.

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. double-click 03 Level. 18 On the Options Bar. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click (Align). click Lines. 14 On the Design Bar. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Tools toolbar.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. under Floor Plans. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. click (Rectangle). 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and a lock icon displays. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor displays. 17 On the Sketch tab. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor.

34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and click OK. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. and on the Options Bar. 31 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. and lock the edges. under Floor Plans. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden.24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 05 Roof Garden. click Edit. Alternatively. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 32 Select the floor. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 97 . 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 On the Sketch tab. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor.

rvt. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Click (Pick Lines). 3 On the Design Bar.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click to place the roof line. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Roof on page 98. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. ■ ■ For Offset. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. double-click 06 Roof. enter 1800 mm. To create the roof. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. click Lines. and press ENTER. When a blue dashed line displays. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof.

enter 300 mm.6 Select grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). for Offset. Adding a Roof | 99 . 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). move the cursor slightly below the grid line. click to place the roof line. and when the blue dashed line displays.

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. click Finish Roof. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area.10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). select the roof. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Adding a Roof | 101 . click (Add new points to the slab shape). click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. move the cursor down below the roof. on grid D. and press ENTER. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. for Elevation. click Section. and click to specify the section. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. 15 On the Options Bar. enter -100 mm.14 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 In the Project Browser. for Structure. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click OK 3 times. select Variable. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. and on the Options Bar. double-click 06 Roof. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. under Floor Plans. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit. for Structure [1]. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. In section. select the roof. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). click Edit/New. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section.20 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). under Construction.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. select Fascia : Fascia . Adding a Roof | 103 . and press DELETE. select the section line. 41 Starting with the left front edge. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. click OK. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. In this case.31 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the roof. moving counter-clockwise. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. 40 In the Type Selector. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. select each edge. 38 In the 3D view. click (Default 3D View). 37 If necessary. click Modify. on the View Control Bar.Roof Edge. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 33 In the warning dialog.

Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add a curtain wall. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click To Building. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. so if you resize the grid.42 On the Design Bar. the curtain wall resizes with it. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You constrain the curtain wall to the grid.

select Horizontal Grid Continuous. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Join Condition.rvt. click Wall. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). select 05 Roof Garden. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . for Type. enter Retail Storefront. The type is saved in the project. click Training Files. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Type Selector. enter 1050 mm. 6 In the Name dialog. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. click to place the first curtain wall segment. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Under Vertical Grid Pattern. click Duplicate. For Level. under Floor Plans. for Spacing. click Edit/New. Click OK twice. and move it slightly toward the building interior. Under Construction. enter 600 mm. and click OK. click 01 Entry Level. When you duplicate a type. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. enter 2100 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 01 Entry Level. For Height. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. for Spacing. For Offset. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.

so they remain in the view.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Design Bar. and trim each curtain wall segment. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. double-click To Building. and lock the dimensions. you can delete the dimensions. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . If you want to hide them. If the grid moves. under 3D Views. click (Trim/Extend). but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. click Dimension. 15 On the View Control Bar. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. These dimensions are not in a sketch.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Creating an Entrance | 107 .

4 On the Model Categories tab. 7 Click OK. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. and click None. and double-click South. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. Do not select Columns. clear one element to clear all the elements. 6 Under Visibility. 5 Under Visibility. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . All the elements in the list are selected. under the element list. as these usually represent internal pilasters. To better work with the curtain wall panels. under Views (all). click Detail Level ➤ Medium. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click All. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 2 On the View Control Bar.

18 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. in the Type Selector. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. select System Panel : Solid. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. in this case an architectural elevation. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. under 3D Views. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and click OK. Creating an Entrance | 109 . double-click {3D}. 10 Select 1 panel. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics.9 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. press and hold CTRL. 12 With the panels selected. 17 In the Project Browser. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Modify. select Architectural Elevation.

20 In the Project Browser. double-click South. under 3D Views. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .19 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

select another mullion to the right. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 30 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 27 On the Options Bar.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. and click to select it. 32 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select One Segment. 24 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. click Add or Remove Segments. and unpin it.

click (Default 3D View). 36 Zoom in to the first panel.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 34 On the View toolbar. and view the new entrance. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and unpin it. press TAB until it is selected. select it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . remove the mullions from the 2nd. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 39 Using the same process. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. open the North elevation. and 4th panels. 3rd. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113.38 Press DELETE. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.

rvt. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click OK. 3 Right-click in the view. select 02 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. for Underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and click View Properties. under Graphics.

10 In the Rename View dialog. The cursor changes to a pencil. click Callout. 9 In the Project Browser. and click to complete the callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. under Floor Plans. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click OK. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 8 Select the callout. and click Rename. enter Display Area. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . select the grip closest to the callout head.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

16 Select the section box. 13 Select the section line. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Flip Section. click Section. right-click. 14 Press ESC. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 12 Draw a section line.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.

double-click 01 Entry Level. click Dimension. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 27 On the Options Bar.135mm Partition (2-hr). Click (Rectangle). and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. expand Sections (Building Section). 25 Press ESC twice. and click Rename. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. click (Align). Lock both alignments. select Wall faces. select Finish Face: Exterior. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. and click OK.17 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . enter Section Display Area. select Basic Wall : Interior . under Floor Plans. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). click Wall. for Prefer. 18 In the Rename View dialog. For Loc Line. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Type Selector. 26 On the Design Bar.

Next. Notice that the walls extend to the floor.) 36 Press ESC twice. click Ceiling. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 37 In the Project Browser. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. and lock the dimension. under Sections (Building Section). Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Section Display Area. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 32 In the Type Selector. 38 On the View Control Bar. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. and lock the dimension. under Ceiling Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level.

Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. and press ESC. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. under Ceiling Plans. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. press TAB until you select the wall chain. double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 In the Project Browser. double-click Section Display Area. enter 2700 mm. click to select it. under Constraints. 46 Press ESC. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top/Base. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. enter 2700 mm. click Modify. and click to select the walls. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . click Attach. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 41 On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. for Base Offset. and click (Element Properties). under Sections. for Height Offset From Level. and click OK. 43 On the Design Bar. and click to select the walls. Select the 02 Level Floor. and click OK. under Constraints. click (Element Properties).

click Cancel. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Rotate).49 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit. 54 Click OK. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. under Construction. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. 58 On the Edit toolbar. for Structure. and click . View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. under Ceiling Plans.

enter 45. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 61 Press ESC. and press ENTER.60 Click. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .

Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. click Shadows Off. click Shadows On. 66 Optionally. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 64 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and click to create a reference plane to the right. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. and for Offset. Move the cursor over grid line B. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. click Training Files.rvt. under Floor Plans. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and copy it to the 05 Level. click Ref Plane.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and click to create a reference plane to the left. enter 1500 mm. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 6 Select the left reference plane. 2. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Stairs. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. C. and 3. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 7 Using the same method. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. shorten the right reference plane.

13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. 10 On the Options Bar. click Wall. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. The complete stair displays. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. 12 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor down. Click (Rectangle).■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. select Finish Face: Interior. and select the 2nd reference plane. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. and specify a point. select Basic Wall : Generic .225mm Masonry. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. including its handrails. beyond the end of the stair.

for Prefer. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Modify. and specify a point away from the wall. Select the wall. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Select the interior face of the wall. Lock the dimension. Select the bottom of the stair. click Align. and press ENTER. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension.15 On the Tools toolbar. enter 1200 mm. select Wall faces. and lock the alignment. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. and click to select it. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 18 Using the same technique. select the dimension value.

select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. a warning displays. 23 Select the stair. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door.21 Select the dimension. click Door. 25 While pressing CTRL. clear Tag on Placement. 28 On the Options Bar. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. 24 On the Standard toolbar. (Undo). and press DELETE. select both reference planes. and press DELETE. Because the dimension is constrained. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. The stair and walls move to the left. TIP To flip the door swing.

You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. click Align. select 00 Foundation. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. select 05 Roof Garden. for Multistory Top Level. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Under Constraints. (Element Properties). (Default 3D View). for Base Constraint.30 On the Design Bar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. double-click 01 Entry Level. Click OK. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Top Constraint. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). (SteeringWheels). verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. 44 On the Tools toolbar. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. (Rectangle). click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 40 Zoom in to the stairs. but if you view the top level of the building. click Modify. 35 On the View toolbar. and move the cursor to spin the building model. select all 4 walls. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. click 36 On the View toolbar. Click OK. under Floor Plans. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). 33 Select the stair.

select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. click see the roof. and lock the alignments. on the View toolbar. and lock the alignment. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . (SteeringWheels).46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. click (Default 3D View). 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft.

for Base Offset. (Default 3D View). Under Constraints. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. click 59 On the View toolbar. For Top Constraint. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. (SteeringWheels).55 In the Project Browser. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. and click OK. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). enter 300 mm. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 56 Select the shaft. By offsetting the base.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. for Underlay. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Right-click in the view. click Wall. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 06 Roof. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. under Graphics.

select Elevation: South.5 In the Type Selector. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 15 In the error dialog. and press ENTER. and on the Options Bar. 11 In the Go To View dialog. and click Open View.225mm Masonry. The exact placement is not important. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click (Align). You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click Remove Constraints. and click (Fillet arc). click Edit Profile. click Lines. 17 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. and then select the right face of the wall. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. click . 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. enter 9750. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements.

and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. double-click {3D}.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 22 In the Project Browser. and click (Circle). select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. under 3D Views. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . click . as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar.

and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 Proceed to the next exercise.

Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. between grid lines C and D. click Component. 5 On the Basics tab. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 .4.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 05 Roof Garden. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Tree .rvt. click Training Files. as shown. TIP After you place the 1st planter. and press ESC twice. 6 In the Type Selector. click Component.5 Meters. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector.

11 Select one of the trees. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. for Height. under Floor Plans. and then click OK twice. as shown. enter Japanese Cherry 1. and on the Options Bar. enter 1500 mm. 17 While pressing CTRL. (Element Properties). under Floor Plans. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest.5 Meters. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Name dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden. enter 2400 mm. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Click Apply. under 3D Views. click Duplicate. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar.5 Meters. For Offset. click Edit/New. under Dimensions. select the 2 remaining trees.8 On the View toolbar. double-click {3D}. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. click (Default 3D View). 18 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). double-click 01 Entry Level. click Floor. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. View the roof. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. and in the Type Selector. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. select M_RPC Tree . click Lines.

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to place the line. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. click (Draw). enter 0 mm. for Offset. 29 On the Options Bar. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. and click to sketch a line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 25 Using the same method.

37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. clear Chain. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click (Trim/Extend). 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 32 Press ESC. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 900 mm. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and click to finish the line.30 On the Options Bar. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1.

47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. for Type. select Rotate after placement. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_RPC Male : Alex. 39 Select the sidewalk. click Component. a photorealistic image displays. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. In plan view. enter Sidewalk. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 48 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 45 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . 42 In the Name dialog. When you render an image. 49 On the Options Bar. enter -250 mm.38 On the Design Bar. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. as shown: (Element Properties). Next. and click so he is facing the column. The completed sidewalk displays. click Finish Sketch. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 Click OK twice. near Column E5. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. click Duplicate. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only.

140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 56 Press ESC twice. select M_RPC Beetle. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. about 30 degrees. 54 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 52 In the Type Selector. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. select M_RPC Female : Cathy.NOTE If necessary. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. click Camera. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). click the car.

under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. 65 Click the sidewalk. under Constraints. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. double-click West. 60 In the Project Browser. click Pick Host. and on the Options Bar. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing.59 In the Element Properties dialog. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. enter -300 mm. If the sidewalk changes height. 64 Select Alex. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. double-click To Building. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. under 3D Views. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. click Pick Host. 63 Click the sidewalk. 66 Using the same method. for Offset. and click OK. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . When you select a host for a component. Next.

and replace them with a service core. After the service core is positioned. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. the elements will be ungrouped in the project.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise.

click Training Files. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. walls. 5 On the View toolbar. 4 Press DELETE.rvt. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. you delete the entire stairwell. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including the stairs. (SteeringWheels). and shaft opening. 3 Select the entire stairwell. click (Default 3D View). click 6 On the View toolbar. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building.

click (Align). 13 In the drawing area.rvt. right-click m_RRB_core. and zoom in to the linked instance. expand Groups. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. and on the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. expand Model. click Training Files. double-click 00 Foundation. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. under Floor Plans. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. and click Create Instance. and notice that the linked file is listed. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click OK.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

click (top down view). click Modify. (SteeringWheels). click 21 On the View toolbar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . click Modify. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 17 On the Design Bar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. ■ ■ Click grid line C. or if the group layout is expected to change. 20 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. and click to align the center. 18 Select the core. 19 On the Design Bar.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Ungroup.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. where it is hosted within a railing family. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 22 Proceed to the final exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. you add glass railings around the floor edges. After you modify it. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and double-click Lounge Perspective. expand Families.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. double-click 02 Level. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click (Split).rvt. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.rvt. and open Metric\m_Conference. press and hold CTRL. and click to split the floor. expand Renderings. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 13 On the Tools toolbar. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. The rendering displays. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. under Floor Plans. Handrail only. The floor sketch displays. and on the Options Bar. and select Glass. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and Parapet. 5 Expand Railing. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. in the Project Browser. 3 In the Conference project. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. click Edit. and expand Railings. 8 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. click OK. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 .

22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. verify that Chain is not selected. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch.15 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click to draw another line. and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 Select grid line B. click (Align). 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click to place it. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Modify. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock to lock the alignment.

for Type. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click Railing Properties. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and lock the alignment. and click OK. and click the lock to lock the alignment. click Railing. click (Align). enter 100 mm. For Offset. 29 On the Design Bar. select Glass. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Finish Sketch. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown.26 Select grid line D. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 33 On the Design Bar.rvt project. Lock the dimensions. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 30 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

click Dimension. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. NOTE For training purposes. and a roof garden. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. slight modifications to the building design have been made. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. balconies. 153 . exterior fire stairs.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. lofty ceilings.

154 .

elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. how to create section and elevation views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. including plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. section. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you learn how to create views from a building model. 155 .

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt. expand Floor Plans. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.

6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Level 2. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. and click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK.

and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click Vicinity Plan. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next. click the current scale. and click OK. 11 Under Floor Plans. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

select 1:100.rvt. click Elevation. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Elevation: Building Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 4 On the Options Bar. for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.

select Section: Building Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. enter South East. 14 In the Type Selector. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and double-click Level 1. 15 On the Options Bar. double-click South East. under Elevations. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. under Views (all). for Scale. click Section. expand Floor Plans. ■ Move the cursor down. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. expand Sections (Building Section). 24 Select gridline F. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. using the blue circular drag grip. and double-click Section 1.21 On the Design Bar.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To create each view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. click Modify. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.

Creating Callout Views | 167 . 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. click Callout. select Floor Plan.rvt. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Resulting callout view . for Scale. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the Type Selector. select 1:50. under Floor Plans. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 4 On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. ■ Select the middle grip. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 9 In the Rename View dialog. select 1:50. for Scale. click Modify. select Detail View: Detail. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 14 On the Options Bar.7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. double-click Section 1. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 13 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. under Sections (Building Sections). click Callout.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

18 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 . double-click Roof Overhang Detail.17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. expand Detail Views (Details).

open Metric\Families\Annotations.rvt. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.rfa.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Open. under Floor Plans. select Custom-Section Head. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Level 1.

notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. enter 12. select Section Head . click Edit/New. and can be applied to the section line. 22 In the Name dialog. 17 Under Category. Section Tail . and click OK. and click OK twice. enter Section Head – Custom. 12 For Section Tag. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 15 Under Category. click Duplicate. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 8 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. scroll to Section Line. 4 On the Design Bar.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab.Custom. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. click Load into Project. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Duplicate. for Section Head. scroll to Section Marks. and select 3. select the section line. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. On the floor plan. Section Tail – Filled. 10 On the floor plan.Filled. and click OK.5mm Square. clear any others. 19 Click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select the current project. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . and select 2. .

29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.23 In the Type Properties dialog. for Callout Tag. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. enter 12. 34 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. . Click OK. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. select Square. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Edit/New. 27 Click OK twice. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Training Files.5 mm. 39 Click OK twice.rfa. . and click OK. For Line Weight. 40 Press ESC. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. clear all others. select the current project. enter 6 mm. select the callout. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. for Elevation Tag. On the floor plan. 30 On the Design Bar. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. and click Open.5mm Square. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click Duplicate. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. For Corner Radius. notice the square elevation markers that display. 36 In the drawing. and on the Options Bar. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select 12. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. select Custom-Callout Head. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Load into Project. click Edit/New. For Dimensions ➤ Width. select 3. Click OK.

you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. expand Callout Boundary. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. view regions. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 46 Under Category.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . masking regions. filters. 45 For Line Pattern. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 49 Click OK. and visual overrides. select Dash. 43 Under Category. You learn to create view templates. click the Annotation Objects tab. scroll down to Callout Boundary. and select 7. and select 4. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

click Zoom to Fit. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click Training Files. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. 5 On the View Control Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click (Hide Crop Region). 6 On the View Toolbar. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. The crop region displays as red. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and double-click East. click (Show Crop Region). Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a View Template In this exercise. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

grids. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 11 Under Visibility. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and section lines are now hidden in the view. elevation markers. 13 On the View Control bar. Creating a View Template | 177 . levels. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. Callouts. under Visibility. clear Entourage.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar.

click OK. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 15 In the New View Template dialog. edit the crop region as before. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click OK.rvt. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Create View Template From View. 16 In the View Templates dialog. double-click North. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 17 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. right-click East. click Apply. 20 Using the same method.14 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. right-click North. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.

select Level Below (Level 4). 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. for View Range. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. and click Properties. under Extents. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 .rvt. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. select Penthouse. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. for Level. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. select Level Below (Level 4). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Under View Depth. click Edit. for Bottom. right-click.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan.

7 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. for Bottom. Under View Depth. select Roof Plan. for View Range. Click OK twice.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. for Level. 6 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Level 4. and click Properties. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level 4. click Edit. under Extents. double-click Roof Plan. under Floor Plans.

NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. select Unlimited. Under View Depth. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. for Level. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Plan Region. click Region Properties. for View Range. 11 On the Options Bar. under Extents. for Bottom. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Click OK twice. In the left corner of the building. click Edit.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Unlimited. Move you cursor diagonally. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Lines.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.17 On the Design Bar. in this case. and double-click Level 1. click Modify. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.rvt. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Floor Plans. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. under Views (all). click the Filters tab. the fire rating of the walls. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . After you apply the filter. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.

and apply a color. 9 Click OK. under Filters. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. select Walls. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Enter Hr. 14 In the Color dialog. for Pattern. 12 On the Filter tab. 10 On the Filter tab. click Edit/New. enter Rated Walls. under Projection/Surface. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Basic colors. and click OK. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click OK. select Solid Fill. for Rated Walls. 17 Using the same method. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Remove. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. Select contains. 16 Click OK. 5 In the Filters dialog. and click OK. select Fire Rating. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click Override under Patterns. click (New). 11 Select Rated Walls. and click OK. click Add. under Categories. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. click <No Override>. 7 In the Filters dialog. select the red color. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . for Color. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.

To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. you obscure geometry in portions of a view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 7 On the View menu. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 11 In the Type Selector. 9 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click Rename. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . select Invisible lines. right-click. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. as shown. 4 On the View Control Bar. 8 Select the crop region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Masking Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. click Show Crop Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 5 On the View menu.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. under Floor Plans.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish Sketch. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle).12 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

under Visibility. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 7 Under Cut. 11 Click OK twice. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color.Level 1. under Pattern Overrides.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. click in the Patterns field. and click OK. select Solid fill. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. for Color. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. right-click Unit 18 Plan . click black. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Rename. click the current scale. and click Override. and click 1: 50.rvt. under Floor Plans. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click OK. right-click. for Pattern.

16 Under Visibility. clear Grids. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Visibility.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. click Modify. clear Floors.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .18 Right-click.

24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 23 In the Color dialog. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click Projection Lines. By using the previous method to make the selection. right-click. select the sofa. click Override. 25 Click OK twice. for Pattern. click a purple color. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 21 Under Projection/Surface. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Lines.20 Right-click. and click OK. for Color. click <No Override> to apply a color. select Dash.

Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . select a bright green color.28 For Color. right-click. 32 Select one of the lamps. and click OK twice. click Modify. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 29 In the Color dialog. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click By Category Override. click . 30 On the Design Bar.

34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click .33 On the View Control Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. how to add views to the sheets.

click Sheet.rvt. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Training Files. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . and click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click View. right-click. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.Creating Sheets.

194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Sheets (all). under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Name.Unnamed. Click OK. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter A101. 5 When the title block highlights. 7 On the Design Bar.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Modify. For Sheet Number. and select the title block. enter Site Plan. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 3 In the Project Browser.

For Client Name. For Project Status.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. MA 12345 12 Click OK. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter For Approval. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. enter Freighthouse Flats. click Edit. enter 15 May. enter J. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2009-1. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Project Name. 2009. For Project Number. 14 Click OK. for Project Address. under Other. Smith. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

you add views to these sheets. select the new sheet name.rvt. and click Save.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. right-click. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Sections A108 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. and click Rename. select A0 metric. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Elevations A106 . and click OK.Layout Plan A104 .Elevations A105 . enter Floor Plan. and click OK.Elevations A107 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Stairs In the following exercise. for Name. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

under Sheets (all). 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click A104 . 2 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Level 1. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and drag it to the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . and click to place the view. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation).Elevations.Floor Plan. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). click Modify. and click to place it. double-click A102 . 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. The red border around the view no longer displays. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.

align it with the East elevation. under Sheets (all). drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. click Modify. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 12 On the Design Bar.Sections. click Modify. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 On the Design Bar. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 .7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it.

move the cursor over it.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. . NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and press TAB until it highlights. 16 Select title bar. for View Scale. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. select 1:5. and on the Options Bar. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . zoom in to the grip. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.

200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. and click to place it. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 18 Under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 1. click Modify. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.Stairs. under Sheets (all). 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 19 On the Design Bar.

click Modify.Sections.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.rvt. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER. enter 16700 mm. under Sheets (all). In order to do this. right-click. 2 Select the building section view. and then make changes and deactivate the view. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Activate View. double-click A107 . 5 On the Design Bar. you must first activate the view on the sheet. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.

After you create the sheet. and click Deactivate View. You modify the view to hide the view title. under Elevations (Building Elevation). you create a title sheet for your drawing set.rvt. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click North. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.6 Right-click. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.

and click OK. enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. enter T. click Camera. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. The camera view displays. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Click OK. select the new sheet name. under Floor Plans. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric. 7 Place the camera as shown. right-click. double-click Level 1.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 .

Under Extents. enter 18000 mm.Title Sheet. For Far Clip Offset. select Far Clip Active. 12 On the View Control Bar. Under Camera. 14 Under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). For Target Elevation. for Eye Elevation. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. enter 100000 mm. enter 1500 mm. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. double-click T . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.

select Scale (locked proportions).15 With the view selected. click Edit/New. for Show title. click Modify. 19 Select the view on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click Duplicate. and then click OK. 25 On the Design Bar. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. 24 Click OK twice. enter 635 mm. for Height. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Click Apply. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. under Graphics. click Modify. on the Options Bar. and click OK. . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Viewport/no title mark. 22 In the Name dialog. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Under Model Crop Size. click Size.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

207 . You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Because of the open style floor plan. expand Floor Plans. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. click Training Files. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Objects In this lesson. such as doors and windows. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as room and window schedules. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. You also learn to create different types of schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial.rvt.

NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. click Room Separation. move the cursor to the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Using the same method. and click Room and Area.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Load. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.6 Using the same method. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

click Training Files. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and click to place the room and tag. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click OK. click it. type 2400 mm. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 14 For Offset.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. indicating that it can be edited. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type U18-1.rfa. click Modify. 11 In the Tags dialog. The room tag number displays in blue. 16 On the Design Bar. click Room. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and select the room tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER.

23 Using the same method. 19 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. type Kitchen. Click to place the new room and tag. click Modify. click Modify. type Entry. and press ENTER. click Room. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Click the room text label. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also supported. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. place rooms and tags. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . and edit the tags as shown (Toilet.18 Click the room text label. Dining.

and moving clockwise. 27 On the Design Bar. but they need to be tagged.Level 2. click Room Tag. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). and click OK. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. 29 On the Design Bar. clear Room Separation. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . on the Model Categories tab. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The rooms are already placed.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. under Floor Plans.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . you learn how to place door and window tags.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar.Level 1. in the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . clear Leader. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . type Storage. 11 Using the same method.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. type Building Entry. next to Rows. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. select Storage. click New. add 5 more rooms. select Corridor. type Corridor. for Name. 101-106. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 105. The room Number is U17-46. and press ENTER. For 104. for room 101. For 102. For 103. 10 Edit the number to be 101.

under Projection/Surface. Under Custom colors. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. you add room separation lines. 4 Click OK twice. expand Lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. type Stair. and press ENTER. click the bright green swatch. click the Lines field. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.■ For 106. click Override. and modify room names. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select 9. under Visibility. For Room Separation. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click the Color field. place rooms from a program list. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. In the Lines field. For Weight. 13 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room Separation.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. draw the horizontal line. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. First.

12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 14 For Offset. type 2400 mm. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. 11 On the Options Bar. for Room. select 101 Building Entry. select 102 Storage. 13 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing.

under Schedules/Quantities. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method. double-click Room Schedule. and zoom in to the Corridor. click Modify. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 17 On the Design Bar. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. place the following rooms. 19 In the Project Browser. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). 20 While pressing CTRL.

click Modify. clear Room Bounding. under Category. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and click Add. (Element Properties).21 On the Options Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. type Units. under Constraints. click 23 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Floor Finish. 24 Open the Room Schedule. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. for Rows. click New. 27 Select Schedule keys. under Available fields. select Base Finish. while pressing CTRL. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. select Rooms. type As Selected. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and Wall Finish. and click OK. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. and for all 3 finishes. 31 For Key Name.

select Rooms. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click (Filter Selection). 43 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. under Schedules/Quantities. right-click Room Schedule. click Edit. and click OK. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. select Units. select Units. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. for Available fields. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fields. select Room Style. 44 On the Options Bar. 36 Click OK twice. click (Element Properties). click Check None. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 38 Under U17-8. and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . under Identity Data. and click Properties. for Room Style. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 42 On the Options Bar. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan.32 Using the same method. double-click Level 1. under Other.

type Room Type. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. for Name. click 5 For Title. For rooms 102 and 105. and click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Room Style. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. expand Floor Plans. type Room Type. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Public. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click the Color Scheme field. 104. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 9 In the Project Browser. 48 Save the file. and 106. for Color. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. and click Properties. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and double-click Level 1. under Views (all). 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. (Duplicate). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. right-click Level 1. under Graphics. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 103. at the warning prompt. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click OK.rvt. select Service.46 Open the Room Schedule.

and click OK. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. select Room Type. under Schemes. under Visibility. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). select the color legend. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click OK twice.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and clear Room Separation. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. click Edit Color Scheme. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . clear Visible. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). click the value in the Color column. click Edit. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. expand Lines. 17 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Color Scheme Legend.

28 Under Title Text. on the Options Bar. (Element Properties). type 25 mm.22 In the Color dialog. 29 Click OK twice. 30 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. respectively. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. for Swatch Width. type 5 mm. under Custom color. and click OK. 23 Using the same method. 24 Click OK. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. select blue. for Size. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit/New.

33 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Building Section. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. for Color Scheme. and select Properties. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Color Scheme Legend. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . under Visibility. 35 Click OK twice. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. under Sections. double-click Building Section. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Edit. select Room Type. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. under Graphics. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. under Sections. select Rooms.

and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. select Public. under Identity Data. 45 While pressing CTRL. under Identity Data. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select all the rooms in the stairwell. for Room Style. and click OK. 46 Click . 42 In the Filter dialog. click . 41 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Units. for Room Style. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. (Filter Selection). and click OK.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. click Check None. select Rooms.

54 While pressing CTRL. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. click New. 51 On the Options Bar. and click . Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . select Service. 49 In the Element Properties dialog.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. under Key Name for the new row. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. under Schedules/Quantities. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. excluding the stairwell spaces. type Suites. and click OK. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. double-click Room Style Schedule. under Identity Data. for Rows. for Room Style.

under Volume Computations.55 Click . verify that At wall finish is selected. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The color fill will extend to the roof. and click OK. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. but not beyond it. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 59 Under Room Area Computation. select Suites. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select Areas and Volumes. The color fill extends to the roof. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. for Room Style. under Identity Data. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. and click OK. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.

64 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Click OK. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 71 Click OK. 67 On the first level. select the stairwell room. select Loft.0. type 0. click Modify. 72 On the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). under Constraints. under Constraints. for Upper Limit. the dining room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. for Upper Limit. type -254 mm. 70 For Limit Offset. 68 Click . and the living room. select Level 2.

you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views.rvt. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .73 Save the file.

9 Using the same method. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Roofs.Insulation on Plywood Deck . Select Grand totals. and click Add. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. under Category. click Modify. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. click Family and Type. 3 While pressing CTRL.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . and click OK.EPDM. Clear Itemize every instance. select Material: Description. under Available fields. select Family and Type. For Then by. 4 In the Type Selector.

for Material: Cost.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. and click OK twice. and click Add. select Material: Area.40 50. and under Fields. select Calculate totals. 17 Click Calculated Value. 12 Click OK. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and click Properties.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Material: Cost. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). right-click Roof Material Takeoff. click Estimated Cost. 21 Click OK. Under Field formatting. click Edit. under Other. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. under Available fields. for Fields. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. select Calculate totals. click the Formatting tab. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 20 For Formula. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. type Estimated Cost. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. select Currency. 23 For Field formatting. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 19 For Type. for Name.

Digit grouping. 29 Select Use digit grouping. In this lesson. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. and are defined and stored in an external file. can be used for any number-based parameter. 27 In the Format dialog. creating a generic tag to tag the family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. you create an exiting plan for the building. regardless of category. You draw a travel path line. for Currency. 31 Save the file. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 30 Click OK twice. and reporting the shared parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . 28 For Unit symbol. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. select $. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. you create a shared parameter file. and schedule the total distance of each path. either within family components or within the project template. for Rounding. The cost fields are formatted correctly. which inserts commas after every three digits. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. tag the line. click the Format value.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. adding the shared parameters to a family. not just for currency.

type Exiting. under Floor Plans. 7 Under Parameters. type Travel Distance.rvt. click New. click New. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 11 Click OK twice. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. and click OK. for Name. for Type of Parameter. type Path ID. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. and click OK. for Name. for Name. click Create.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 9 Under Parameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for File name.txt. under Groups. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click Training Files. select Length. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.

under Parameter Type. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. type Length. click Load into Projects. 14 On the Design Bar. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Parameters. 10 Using the same method. for Travel Distance Formula. group it under Dimensions. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . 3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. in the Load into Projects dialog.rfa. under Parameter Data. 11 Click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. following the equals symbol (=). select Shared parameter.rvt. and select Instance. click Add. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.rvt. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. 15 If necessary. 9 In the Family Types dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. select Constraints. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. for Group parameter under. click Family Types. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. click Add. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click Select. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. If you have multiple projects open. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 13 Click Apply. 8 Select Instance.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. under Parameters. Click Training Files.

click (Add Parameter). click Training Files. 19 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 24 Click OK twice. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click parameter(s) to label). click Label. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click Label. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. under Category Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.rft. and click OK. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Select.

31 Click File ➤ Save As. for File Name.rfa. 33 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. type M_Travel Distance Tag. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.rvt is selected. and click OK. click Load into Projects. 35 Save the file. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. and move it down. and click Save. 32 In the Save As dialog. 29 In the drawing window.28 On the Design Bar. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. click Modify. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . select Path ID.

You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID.Tagging. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 6 Move the cursor to the right. After the lines are tagged. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Placing. 4 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. double-click Exiting Plan . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Level 1. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. under Floor Plans. and click in the center of the corridor. above the exterior door as shown. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 .7 Move the cursor down. 13 While pressing CTRL. verify that Chain is selected. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Component. clear Leader.Level 2. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click (Element Properties). select the 2 dashed travel lines. through the door. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. for Path ID. type 1-1.Tagging. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click outside of the building. Placing. 12 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan . under Constraints. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. move the cursor near the right corner. 10 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category.

22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click. click Modify. and click in the stair. move the cursor to the left. and click above the door to the stair. 21 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor down. click Component.

24 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. type 2-1. click Tag ➤ By Category. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . 28 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. click Modify. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. under Category. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. and click OK. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. 33 For Name. for Path ID. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Constraints. 30 Using the same method. Placing. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. . 26 Select each of the travel path lines.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson.rvt. in the first field. 42 Click OK. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. 36 For Filter by. under Available fields.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Add. while pressing CTRL. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. under Other. and under Field formatting. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 35 Click the Filter tab. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. and click Properties. for Filter. select Path ID and Travel Distance. select contains. select Path ID. type 2-. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. in the third field. 41 Under Fields. and click OK. select Calculate totals. and in the third field. in the second field. for Filter by. 38 For Sort by. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. click Training Files. 40 Click the Formatting tab. select Path ID. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Schedules/Quantities. 43 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 44 In the Project Browser. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 49 Click OK twice. type Level 2 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. type 1-. 50 Save the file. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Rename. click Edit.

and click View. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Fixed Partitions. and click . click the Fields tab. 9 Click OK twice. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Value field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. 4 Under Available fields.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Partitions . under Categories. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. select Walls. 10 In the schedule. right-click Generic . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click the Design Bar. for Assembly Code. expand C .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. under Identity Data. and click Properties.Interiors ➤ C10 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and select C1010145 .152 mm. select the following fields.

click Create. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.rvt.mdb). and click Next. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. under Database. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select a location for the database file.mdb. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 3 Click New. for Database Name. 1 On the File menu. click OK. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 9 Under Directories. 11 Click OK 3 times. type Revit_Project. and click Next. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.11 Close the exercise file. 8 In the New Database dialog. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. the database display may be different than that shown. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click OK to create the database. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 6 Click Finish. click Training Files. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. click the File Data Source tab. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database.

A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. in addition to the Id column. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. 13 Close the exercise file. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. For example. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Additionally. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.

262 .

Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. 263 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. you trace over the building model geometry. In order to detail from the building model. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. add detail components. In the callout view. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. These components display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. like a standard door header condition. 297 . plywood.Detailing 7 In this tutorial.

select As underlay. 5 In the alert dialog. click Detail Component.rvt. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the drawing area. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and click Open.Detailing the View In this exercise. you detail the view of the roof edge. After you add components. They are also view specific. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. click Training Files. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. and insulation objects. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. The roof overhang detail displays. region objects. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Exact location is not important. click Yes to load a Detail Items family.rfa. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. You load detail components. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click the detail callout head. which means that all detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. as well as detail lines.

for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Repeating Detail. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Detailing the View | 299 .8 Delete the component. 19 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Duplicate. click (Element Properties). 15 For Spacing. click Modify. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 17 In the drawing area. 16 Click OK twice. enter 406. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. select Corrugated Metal. 10 On the Options Bar.5mm. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar.

click (Move). click Training Files. and click Open. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 22 On the Options Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Load. 24 In the Type Selector. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.rfa. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. ■ ■ Click Modify. click Detail Component. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar.

click Detail Component. and place it in the detail view as shown. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Open. 30 In the Type Selector. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.Because you still have several components to load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. click OK. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 33 In the Type Selector. you load them as a group from a single file. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 To properly orient the component. click Training Files. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Detailing the View | 301 .rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. press SPACEBAR 3 times.

37 Click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 38 Select the horizontal segment. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. click the Flip instance arrows. select Chain.

42 Click Modify. click Detail Component. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. select to near side. click Insulation. Detailing the View | 303 . 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify. enter 140mm. as shown. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. For Offset. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.

2 In the Type Selector. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. meaning they display only in this view. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. select Thin Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 51 Click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. you add lines to your detail. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm.45 In the Type Selector. 47 In the Type Selector. and lock the component. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed.rvt. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. as shown. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Like detail components. they are view specific. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise.

9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. For Offset. enter 10mm. as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . and press ENTER. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. enter 10mm. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 11 In the Type Selector. For Offset. select Thin Lines. 7 In the Type Selector.4 Click Modify. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. as shown.

15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. click (Draw). 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. select Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown.

18 In the Type Selector. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. click Detail Lines. select Vapor Barrier. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 22 In the Project Browser. Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. right-click. enter 10mm. For Offset. select Do not display. 24 On the View Control Bar. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 26 In the Type Selector. draw the detail lines as shown. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select the Penthouse level line. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. and click Properties. When you turn the display model off. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. for Graphics ➤ Display Model.

30 In the Type Selector. you add text notes to complete the detail. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select M_Break Line. 32 Click Modify. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Adding Text Notes on page 308.29 On the Design Bar. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

click Text. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 2 On the Options Bar. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. Enter the text. 6 Click Modify. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Text Fields. right-click. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK.Keynotes. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.7 Select the dimension line. right-click.. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click Roof Overhang Detail. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and click Rename. click Select All Instances. and press DELETE. select a text note. and click OK. on the Options Bar. enter Typ. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click the dimension text. Creating Detail Components on page 310. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and save the exercise file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click OK. for Suffix. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. right-click.rvt. (Filter Selection). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.

You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. and click Open. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Creating Detail Components | 311 . while pressing CTRL. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. and selecting the chain. select all the coping linework.7 Click Modify. 14 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 16 Click Modify. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. in the Type Selector. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.rft. 15 Use a window to select all linework. select Medium Lines. click Training Files. pressing TAB.

The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. enter Roof Edge. 28 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. 30 In the drawing area. you place keynotes on objects. 23 Using a window. While pressing SHIFT. and the component can be placed in the detail. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. double-click it in the Project Browser. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. select the coping. 26 Press DELETE. 27 On the Design Bar. for File name. click Detail Component. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Load. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. clear Detail Items. 31 Using the same method used previously. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail .18 In the Save As dialog. click Load into Projects. navigate to your preferred location. delete the underlying linework. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Filter dialog. and click Save. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Open. and click OK. The original linework remains selected. 22 Click Modify. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 21 To place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click . Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.rfa.Keynotes view is not the open view. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Click to place the leader arm.D11. Roof Edge4. 2 In the alert dialog.B5. 6 Click Modify. 63mm Rigid Insulation. In the Keynotes dialog. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. click Edit/New. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties). select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.C1. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. select the metal fascia with drip edge. and click Open. click Keynote ➤ Element. Adding Keynotes | 313 . use keynote 06160.rfa. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. use keynote 07645. For the metal coping. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. and click OK. 19mm Plywood. click Training Files. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.

12 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. For the 50 x 150.I1. 15 In the Type Selector. 17 Keynote the component. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. You do this in order to keynote the component. and click . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 06110. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. using keynote 07460. use keynote 06160. use keynote 09250.A8. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.D1. For the 50 x 300. 18 Save the file.9 In the Type Properties dialog. 22mm Corrugated Steel .F1. use keynote 06110.20 Ga. click Detail Component.G1.D11. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.F1. click in the Value column. click Keynote ➤ Element. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. FasciaProfile_1. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. For the 50 x 200. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. use keynote 06110. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. select Corrugated Metal. navigate to 07645.

select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Training Files.rft. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 13 In the Type Selector. 11 Press DELETE. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select Medium Line Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Duplicate. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for File name. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 6 Lock the line. click Load into Projects. 8 In the Save As dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. and click Save. and click Open. 24 While pressing CTRL. 19 In the Name dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Edit/New. and click (Element Properties). and click Modify. select the left end point of the reference line. navigate to your preferred location. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 5 In the drawing area. select Medium Lines. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. and select the right end point. 9 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. click Training Files. click Detail Component. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 22 On the Options Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. and click Open. 4 In the Type Selector.rvt. 15 Click Modify. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 Select the component. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

click Detail Component. against the 19mm plywood. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. click Detail Component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 40 Click Modify. click Duplicate. and click . 42 Using the same method used previously. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 46 Click Modify.A1. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and click .25 Next. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. invisible. 41 Select the component just added. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. click Edit/New.G1. enter EPDM Membrane. 38 On the Design Bar. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Detail Component. and assign it keynote 06110. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 31 Select the component. and click the lower end at the break line. 29 In the drawing area. 47 Select the component. 34 In the Name dialog. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 28 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 30 Click Modify.A5. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and assign it keynote 07260. and hidden) used in the view. 49 With the component selected. name the component Air Barrier. and click . Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 37 Click OK 3 times. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 27 On the Design Bar. and click . on the Edit toolbar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 48 Using the same method used previously. name the component 50 x 200 Framing.

select Chain.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click . 55 Click Modify. 52 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . leaving the detail component lines. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 53 On the Options Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier.

rfa. select Invisible Lines. and assign it keynote 07260.A4. 61 In the drawing area. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 68 In the drawing area. select the component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 60 On the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. in the Type Selector.58 Using the method used previously. and Vapor Barrier. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. Air Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. name the component Vapor Barrier. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa. click Load into Projects. 50 x 200 Framing. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 67 In the Type Selector. 63 In the drawing area.

Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. and close the text editor. and click .. 3 In the text editor.rvt. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. under Keynote Table. and press TAB.A4. Enter 07460. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. click Browse. Enter 07463. and assign it keynote 07210. 72 Save the file.A1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. The database file opens in a text editor. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.txt. 70 Using the method used previously. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 71 In the drawing area.69 Select the component. click File menu ➤ Save. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and press TAB.A9. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . add a keynote for the component. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press ENTER. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. name the component Batt Insul.

320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. under Path Type. you learn how to create a drafted detail. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type.A1. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. In the Type Selector. Each keynote displays as a simple number. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 11 Click Modify. select all the keynotes. click Keynote ➤ Element. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. and click OK. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07463. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. click to place the leader. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. select Absolute. and click to place the note. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 14 Save the file. 9 In the drawing area. After you create a drafting view. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). 13 Click Modify.txt. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. These details do not update with changes to the building model. and click Open.

and click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . click Training Files. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. The detail that you import is in DWG format. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. enter EPDM Metal Coping. for Scale. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. For Colors.rvt. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.dwg.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. right-click Drafting 1.rvt. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. select 1 : 5. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that Auto . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 7 In the Rename View dialog. For Positioning. select Black and White. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Center to Center is selected. and click OK. Click Open.

for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area.No Reference. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. delete the existing value. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. click Edit/New. click Callout. 6 Select the callout. 12 Click OK twice.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. for New. click Rename. enter Detail . select Reference other view. 10 In the Rename dialog. and click Properties. 3 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

/Det. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . The callout is updated with the sheet information. 18 Save the file. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. double-click A105 . you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. click Modify. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . and double-click the callout.No Reference). 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.Elev. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar./Sect. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.

click Duplicate. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. . 14 Click OK 3 times. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. select Gypsum-Plaster. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 11 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 3 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. enter Header @ Sliding Door. enter Gyp. for Name. for Name. Board. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. click Detail Component.rvt. 5 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. click Region Properties. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. verify that the scale is 1 : 5.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

18 While pressing CTRL.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click Finish Sketch. 19 In the Type Selector.5mm. and enter 20. select Wide Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . (Mirror). select the left and bottom edges of the region. 17 Click Modify. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. click 22 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click . and on the Edit toolbar. click (Draw). Draw a rectangle as shown. select the width dimension. 20 On the Design Bar.

click Edit/New. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Wood . enter Wood .Finish. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the mirrored region.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click Region Properties. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. for Name. click Filled Region.Finish. 25 Click Modify. 30 In the Name dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Move the cursor up. . and click OK. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog.

Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 37 On the Design Bar. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. select Medium Lines. Draw a rectangle as shown.5mm. and select the right edge of the wood region. click (Rectangle). 38 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . click . select Medium Lines. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 39 In the Type Selector. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. sketch the new region as shown. click Filled Region. click (Align). 40 On the Options Bar.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click 48 Click Modify. click Ref Plane. 47 Click the reference plane. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. enter 6mm. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. (Align). 46 On the Tools toolbar. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. click Filled Region.42 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. and press ENTER.

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor down 305mm. and press ENTER. For Offset. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Select Chain. and click to select the point. and select the bottom horizontal line.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm. click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point. 56 On the Design Bar. and click to select the point. enter 0. Move the cursor right 25mm.

2mm. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 69 Select the bolt. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Detail Component. For Offset. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 65 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. enter 76. select the height dimension. and right edges of the door panel region. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. top. 61 Click Modify.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Load. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa. 60 Select the left. 68 Click Modify. enter 3mm. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. and click Open. 62 Select the left detail line. click Training Files. 58 In the Type Selector.

rfa. click Detail Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.70 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . select Wide Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. click Training Files. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. click Detail Component. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 71 On the Options Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. use the images as a guide. 76 In the Type Selector. click Load. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.

332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 87 Click Modify.78 On the Design Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. 80 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click . click Detail Lines. 84 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. (Mirror). click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. select Thin Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click .

drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click Detail Lines. as shown.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. select Medium Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. click (Mirror). 90 In the Type Selector. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 89 On the Design Bar. 92 Select the line.

97 On the Options Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. and click to place the arc as shown. click Detail Component. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 102 In the Type Selector. 101 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. enter 3mm. click . select the length dimension. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 99 Click Modify.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 95 On the Design Bar.

105 In the drawing area. 108 In the Type Selector.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 107 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. click Dimension. 110 Select the dimension line. 106 Click to place the dimension. using the Drag Text grip. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Dimension. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and click Modify.

118 Select Modify to end the command. 113 Under Text Fields. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. click Dimension. select Replace With Text. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear .5mmArial. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. under Dimension Value.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. for Below. 114 Click OK. select Replace With Text. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. under Dimension Value. enter See Schedule. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter Varies. and click the dimension text.2. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. and then click the dimension text.

select the gypsum board region on the left. and on the Options Bar. 128 Select the note. click to create an arced leader. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 126 In the drawing area. Enter 225 mm @ Type C.121 Click OK. click Text. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 127 Enter Gyp. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. and click Modify. 123 Click OK. 125 In the Options Bar. Board. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and click to place the text.

click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

click Training Files. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. 339 .

rfa. 8 Select the keynote.Hexagon. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Training Files. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type 1. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Symbol.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Modify. for Number of Leaders. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 7 On the Design Bar.

click (Copy). 13 Select the tag. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. type Seal existing doors and insulate.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. Creating a Note Block | 341 . for Text. and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Element Properties). 12 On the Edit toolbar. under Identity Data.

17 Click OK. click Copy. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 19 With the tag selected. (Mirror). and click. 18 Using the same method. on the Edit toolbar. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. type B. click (Element Properties). make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 16 For Tag. on the Options Bar. 15 For Text. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.14 With the copy selected. type Repair existing door surround. and on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building.

Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Repair as required.21 On the Design Bar. Remove all existing windows. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. 22 Optionally. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. using the table as a reference. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Tuckpoint as required. Clean exterior brick wall. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . click Modify.

for Sort by. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. type 6 mm. select Tag. and click Add. and click OK. and double-click A103 . and for Alignment. under Available fields. select Tag. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. select Exterior Construction Notes. expand Schedules/Quantities. and select Bold. expand Sheets (all). for the value. and drag it to the sheet. for Note block name. Clean cut and repair wall as required. 28 In the Project Browser. for Heading. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 26 Click OK. Select Text. 27 In the column header (text). select Center. type Description. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 24 In the New Note Block dialog.Elevations. verify that Arial is selected. format. On the Appearance tab. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. On the Formatting tab. for Header text. type Mark. 29 In the Project Browser. type Exterior Construction Notes. Create.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and click Add.

rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. under Sheets (all). click Modify. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T .31 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.Title Sheet. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 1 In the Project Browser.

in the first field. select Sheet Number. under Sheets (all). for Filter by. type T. The drawing list displays. under Available fields. 7 In the Project Browser. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 5 In the list title field. select Sheet Index. On the Filter tab. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. Select Sheet Name. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Add. 6 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. for Sort by. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Sheet Number. and click Add. in the second field. select does not equal.Title Sheet. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. ■ 4 Click OK. and drag it to the sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. double-click T . and in the third field.

9 On the Design Bar. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. 11 Save the file. Finally. On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. click Modify. For the text. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Training File Using Legends | 347 . and door frames. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. and so on). 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. windows. door frame schedule. On construction documents. doors.

4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 10 For Text Size. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Open Level Head . type Legend Text. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. type Typical Symbol Legend. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Symbol.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . for Name. and click OK twice. type 3mm. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.rvt. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Edit/New. 6 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. click Text. 9 For Text Font. click Duplicate. you create a text type with the necessary size.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. select Arial. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. for Name.

16 In the Project Browser. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and for Leader.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 14 Working from the top down. expand Legends. and double-click A101 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. verify that is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and click to place it. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . expand Sheets (all).

click Modify. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Viewport : No Titlemark. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.Unit 18. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 23 Save the file. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark. double-click A102 . and click to place it. 22 On the Design Bar. under Sheets.17 In the Type Selector.

Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 5 On the View Control Bar. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. click Legend Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 3 For Scale. select Section. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select 1 : 50. and click OK. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type 900 mm. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. and press ENTER. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. For View. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Medium for Detail Level. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. For Host length.

and on the Options Bar.9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click to add text without a leader. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. for Family. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. click Modify. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click Text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 12 In the Type Selector.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. for Leader. 10 Select the second wall.

17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. right-click Sheets (all). 23 In the Project Browser. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. under Floor Plans. 19 Type the following text. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add text with a single-segment leader.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select Level 4. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and drag it to the new sheet. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. and click New Sheet. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.

drag it onto the sheet. double-click Level 4. click Modify to end the command. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 26 On the Design Bar. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.25 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. under Legends. 29 In the Project Browser.

zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select Detail Level: Medium. 33 In the floor plan view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 34 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 35 On the View Control Bar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. click (Match Type). 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. select the Wall Type 2 component. Creating a Component Legend | 355 .

36 Optionally. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. In this exercise. click 37 Save the file. or changes in building material availability. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Using the table. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Floor Plans. These changes can be due to owner requests. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. contractor inquiries. double-click Level 4. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract.

if the active revision is number 1. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 5 For Description. In most instances. type a date. for Numbering. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. verify that Per Project is selected. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. When you use this option. If Visible is not selected. When Issued is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. If you select Per Sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 7 Under Show. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. In general. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. yet as concise as possible. For example.

4 On the Edit toolbar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 4. including revision number and revision date. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. under Floor Plans. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 9 Save the file. you make changes to the project floor plan. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 5 Select the divider. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. click (Move).8 Click OK. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 Select the divider.rvt. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall.

and click OK. click near the partition you moved. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the Snaps dialog. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. select Snaps Off. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 8 In the drawing area. click Revision Cloud. 11 On the Design Bar.

15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 17 Save the file. for Line Weight. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. 16 Click OK. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click the Annotation Objects tab. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select 6. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud.

scroll down to Revision Clouds. You then issue a revision. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 6 Click Load. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. click OK. 11 Click to place the tag. you need to add one. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.rvt. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you create additional revisions in the revision table. and because the revision is the first in the project.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category.rfa. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 4 On the Options Bar. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 12 Save the file. 10 In the drawing area. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 5 In the Tags dialog. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. select Leader. click Tags. 8 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. Working with Revisions In this exercise. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Because you chose to number by project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar.

select Issued.rvt. You can continue to add revisions. under Sheets. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. You do this by issuing the revision. you prevent further changes to the revision.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. click Add. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and enter a date for the revision. 9 Click OK. 8 Add another revision row. double-click A107 . 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. type Modify Paving Area. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. you can no longer modify it. and enter a date. with the description Relocate Door. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. and click OK. 7 For Description.Unnamed.

3 . and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 10 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. double-click Level 4. select Seq. select the revision cloud. 13 Click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. click to add a revision clouds. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 19 To add tags. 2 . select Tag ➤ By Category. apply Seq. 15 On the Options Bar.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. Working with Revisions | 363 . Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 20 On the Project Browser. 11 On the Drafting tab. double-click A107 . click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. under Sheets (all). for Revision.Modify Paving Area. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 12 In the drawing area. in the drawing area. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select Revision Cloud.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet.

beginning with "D". The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 26 In the drawing area. height. and rotation) to the revision schedule. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You do this so that the revision can be changed. clear Issued. for Sequence. you edit the titleblock family. select Alphabetic. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. For each revision. In order to make formatting changes (appearance.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. for Numbering. Click Options. 25 Click OK twice. delete the first 3 characters. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. select the titleblock. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog.

31 In the Revision Properties dialog. click Load into Projects. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. for Appearance. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. click Yes. Working with Revisions | 365 . 34 On the Design Bar. click Yes. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. select Bottom-up. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. under Other. and drag it above the schedule area. Select Grid lines. for Build Schedule. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Select Outline. click Modify. 28 In the alert dialog. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 33 Select the schedule header. click Edit Family. Clear Blank row before data. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. right-click Revision Schedule.27 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. and press DELETE. click Edit. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. and click Properties. 30 In the Element Properties dialog.

48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. for Formatting. select 90° Counterclockwise. 45 On the Appearance tab. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Heading. When the height property is variable.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. for Rotation on Sheet. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. open the titleblock family for editing. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . With a user-defined height. select User defined. 40 Select the revision schedule header. and on the Options Bar. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. 46 Click OK twice. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. for Height. and click Properties. under Other. enter Rev. click Edit. select the revision schedule. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser.. right-click Revision Schedule.

50 In the Reload Family dialog. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 51 Save the file. you learn to import information (such as images. text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes.

4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . 5 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.JPG. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. double-click T . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Importing Image Files In this exercise. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. under Sheets. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click Modify. and place it on a sheet.rvt. click Training Files. click Text.rvt.Title Sheet.

Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 .Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 11 Save the file. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. with the new text box still selected. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click Modify. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.doc text file in another window. 6 Select the text. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.

for File name. 12 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 4 Under Printer.rvt. 10 On the Design Bar.mdi. click Desktop. This step has been completed for you. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . This exercise demonstrates a common method. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.Unit 18. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.xls. and saved as Fixture Schedule. double-click A102 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Print. for Name. 5 Click OK. and click Save. select the document writer.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.JPG. type Fixture Schedule. This process may vary from system to system. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. click Modify. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.JPG.

Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. or footprint. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. you break up the plan into sections. as well as a large lab building. called dependent views. The large floor plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 371 .

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.

enter Level 2 . The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. and the model crop is the interior crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. under Floor Plans. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 6 In the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2.Aviary. select the crop region. 5 Click in the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. under Level 2. for Name. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. The dependent view opens. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . click (Hide Crop Region).

Labs. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. click Zoom To Fit. for Name. 14 Click in the drawing area. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). and click OK. 15 Select the crop region. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. enter Level 2 . 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .10 Click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Level 2.

click Matchline.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click Zoom To Fit. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. under Floor Plans. 19 On the View Control Bar. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. and click. 24 On the Design Bar. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building.

select Double Dash. select 9. 33 In the Project Browser. right-click A101 .Aviary.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 31 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. 27 Under Matchline. click the Annotation Objects tab. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.Unnamed. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. click Level 2 . 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 28 For Line Pattern. click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . for Line Weight. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Level 2 Aviary. and click OK. for Name. expand Sheets. and click OK.

verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 39 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. for Target view.Labs dependent view on the sheet. click View Reference.Aviary is selected. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.35 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. and place the Level 2 . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. under Floor Plans. click Modify.

click Modify. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 44 On the Design Bar. for Target view.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .Labs. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . click Zoom To Fit. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. right-click. double-click Level 2 . 49 If. under Floor Plans. after modifying the annotation crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click (Show Crop Region). click the far right control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 47 On the View Control Bar.46 In the Project Browser. 48 Select the crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.Aviary.

53 In the Select Views dialog.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 51 On the View Control Bar. 55 On the Zoom flyout. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and click OK. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . click Zoom To Fit. 54 In the Project Browser. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. under Floor Plans. and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. select all views in the list. expand Level 1. right-click Level 2. 52 In the Project Browser. but are not placed on sheets. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1.

57 On the Zoom flyout. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Zoom To Fit. click Training Files. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The matchline is already placed in the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation.

cropping the view to the aviary. cropping the view to the lab building. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser. for Name. enter South Elevation . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. and click OK. 5 In the drawing area. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter South Elevation . and drag it toward the center of the view. select the Crop Region. and click Rename. right-click South Elevation. expand South Elevation. 7 On the View Control Bar. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser.Left. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 .Right. 11 Select the crop region. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left.The dependent view opens.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.

Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The perspective view displays. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

and click Show Camera. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view.3 Zoom out. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. With the camera shown. as necessary. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. and adjust the field of vision. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. as shown. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. right-click 3D View 1. in the Project Browser. and select the crop boundary. If the camera is not shown in the view. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . Depending on camera placement. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted.

6 In the Project Browser.Day to open the view. right-click 3D View 1.Day. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click Rename. 10 Save the file. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. double-click Exterior . 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Exterior .

rvt. modify render settings. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and render a daytime view of the exterior.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Day. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You then duplicate the view. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior . under 3D Views. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 .

for Setting. You adjust cloud settings as required.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. select Sky: Cloudy. 6 Click OK twice. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Spring Equinox. 3 In the Rendering dialog. 5 In the Rename dialog. under Lighting. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. under Background. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In this case. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 8 Under Quality. You create a location and time for the rendering. click (Show Rendering Dialog). the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. and click Render. 3pm. and click Rename. for New. select Medium. 7 In the Rendering dialog. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. select Edit/New. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. NOTE If a background image is required. for Sun. enter Spring Equinox .Santa Monica.

The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Desktop. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. select Portable Network Graphics (*. For Files of type. 10 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering.png). click Export. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog.9 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. Click Save. click Show the model. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.

To create a similar view using different rendering settings. select the first light. and select the last light. enter Pool House Lights. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . under Group Options. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. click Render. 25 Using the same method. for Name. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click Move to Group. select Exterior: Artificial only.Flat Round : 60W . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. verify that Pool Lights is selected. under Group Options.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.Night view open.Exterior . 22 Using the same method. under Lighting.Day. click New. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. you duplicate the view and change the settings. and click OK.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W . right-click Exterior . 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Night. on the View Control Bar. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.Night. under Ungrouped Lights. dialog.Flat Round : 60W .Flat Round : 60W . 27 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme.120V. click OK. 16 With the Exterior .120V to the Pool Lights group. and click OK. press and hold SHIFT. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. and click Artificial Lights. for Name. 24 In the New Light Group dialog.Day view to Exterior . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Ungrouped Lights. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . add 30 :Sconce Light . highlight 9 :Sconce Light . click Dialog). To select a sequential list. click New. enter Pool Lights. and click OK.

30 In the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. click Show the model. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. After the image is rendered. and click OK. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. for Exposure Value. In this example. enter 4. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . under Image. click Adjust Exposure. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. 32 Save the file. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog.

define the perspective view and rendering settings.rvt. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . render the views.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. and finally. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

6 Select the figure. and place the component inside the pool house. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ (Rotate). Adding RPC People | 413 . 5 On the Design Bar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. double-click Level 1. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. the person’s line of sight. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Exact placement is not important. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Component. select RPC Female : YinYin. click Modify. under Floor Plans.

12 Click OK 3 times. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In order to see the figure’s reflection. for Render Appearance Properties. on the Options Bar. you can enable this option. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. By default. select Cast Reflections. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Save the file. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Modify. under Parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. click Edit.

Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. click Camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. c_Pool_House_in_progress. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.

The perspective view displays. under Extents. select Section Box. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Properties. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. under 3D Views. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.

double-click South. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. double-click Level 1. select the section box. under Floor Plans.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 11 In the 3D view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . 9 In the Project Browser. in addition to the 3D view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 8 In the Project Browser. In order to accurately adjust the section box.

size the box as shown. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 13 In the South Elevation view.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. right-click. 14 In the 3D view. select the section box. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

and curtain walls. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 .15 Maximize the 3D view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 17 Save the file. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and render the interior view. To create a daytime view. doors that contain windows or glass. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.

Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. enter Interior . 2 In the Rename View dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. and click OK. under 3D Views. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 4 In the Rendering dialog.rvt. for Scheme. for Setting.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Render.Night. 7 Under Quality. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 5 Click Artificial Lights. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 3 On the View Control Bar. clear Pool Lights. under Lighting. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. select Draft. and click Rename. After these settings are established. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. right-click 3D View 1. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. click (Show Rendering Dialog). You can specify a lower quality. you turn them off for this scene.

For more information on daylight portals. and click Render. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. for Sun. For sunlit interiors. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . By default they are turned off. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. for Scheme.Night. 13 In the Rendering dialog. In this case. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. you must create a custom setting. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views.Day.Santa Monica. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. but the space will receive standard daylighting. select Curtain Walls. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . and click OK. select Spring Equinox . Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. 3pm. in order to turn on daylight portals. click Copy To Custom. (Show Rendering Dialog). the daylight portals can be turned on. select Interior: Sun only. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. The preset schemes are read-only.9 Close the Rendering dialog. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. 17 In the Rendering dialog. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. for Daylight Portal Options. right-click Interior . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You create a view for the interior during the day. select Edit. select Region. click 14 For Setting.

enter 10. For Saturation. and on the Options Bar. and close the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. under Image. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. select the column on the right. click Show the model. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Properties). Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Click OK. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. enter 1. In the next steps. 20 In the Rendering dialog.

After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection.22 In the Element Properties dialog. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Based on wood grain. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. select Printer. 29 In the Rendering dialog. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. click the dimensions for Size. 24 In the Materials dialog. enter 90. 28 In the Rendering dialog. and click Render. 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). You change the varnish setting. the render time increases significantly. clear Region. for Resolution. select Scale (locked proportions). 26 Click Update Preview. For Rotate. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . for Setting. select the crop boundary. Click OK. select Unfinished. For Width. As size and DPI are increased. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 23 With the column still selected. select High. For Amount.6. For Bump. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. add a bump map to create texture. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. select Wood. enter 5''. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. click OK. under Output Settings.

Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. elevation. In a plan view. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Usually. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. or section view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames.The rendered image displays. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. The walkthrough path is a spline. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. but you can also define it in a 3D. independent of the Revit Architecture software. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. verify that Perspective is selected. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and change unit formats as desired. click Settings ➤ Project Units. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and click the tab in the context menu. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. proceeds through the dining room. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . on the Options Bar. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Walkthrough. click Training Files. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and double-click 1st Floor. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. If you prefer to use metric values.

Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Finish.

select the crop boundary. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and click OK. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. If it is not. 12 On the View menu. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. for Width. verify that Field of view is selected. enter 1. and select the crop boundary. and for Height. and click OK.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 14 Click . enter 9''. enter 16''. for Frame. 11 Under Change. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). click the dimensions for Size. click Edit Walkthrough. on the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 17 Click .

The walkthrough plays. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. press ESC. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. proceed to the next exercise. double-click 1st Floor. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 2 On the Options Bar. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. c_Townhouse. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. under Extents. under Floor Plans. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. and click OK. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. clear Far Clip Active. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. click (Element Properties).

5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and drag it to the location shown. select Path. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the third key frame position.

you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. shading with edges. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. under Walkthroughs. click File menu ➤ Save As. hidden line. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. and click Save. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. The walkthrough is recorded. and click OK. for Compressor. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. on the Options Bar. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . reducing the size of the image. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 3 Under Format. c_Townhouse. and click OK. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. under Output Length. When you export the walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. If you are unsure of what option to use. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. enter 15.rvt. select <Shading>. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. for Model Graphics Style. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. or rendering. click Edit Walkthrough. . double-click Walkthrough 1. 9 To play the walkthrough. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. specifying the number of frames. for Frames/sec. shading.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 8 If you want to save this exercise.

you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. More specifically. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. 431 . you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. In this tutorial. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.

expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. as shown. (SteeringWheels). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the View toolbar. click Camera. expand Views (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Solar Study . and open Common\c_Solar_Study. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.Courtyard View In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. A 3D view is created. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. click shown. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and double-click 01 Entry.

click Save As. click Section. 7 In the Project Browser. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view.Courtyard View. you create a section cutaway view. enter Solar Study . 9 On the File menu. as shown. expand 3D Views. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.5 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. if necessary. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. Create section 1 In the Project Browser.

434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. as shown. and click Rename. 6 To view the section. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. expand Sections. 7 In the Project Browser. 11 On the SteeringWheel. click Modify. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. click 10 On the View toolbar. double-click the section head. right-click Section 1. (SteeringWheels).5 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click . enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Modify. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway.

right-click {3D}. as shown. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. including the house. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. under 3D Views. 6 In the Rename View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. you create a plan cutaway view. and click OK. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Typical plan views. then Fine. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. and click OK. click . In some cases. click Save.14 In the Project Browser. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. clear Section Boxes. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. and click OK. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. then select Medium. under Floor Plans. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Callout. 18 On the File menu. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 17 To hide the section box. do not display many elements in 3D. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click 01 Entry.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. 16 On the View Control Bar. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse.

click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 9 On the SteeringWheel. as shown. 11 On the Design Bar.8 On the View toolbar. 15 Select the Roof. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. as shown. click (SteeringWheels). 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Modify. so you can see into the building from the top. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 16 On the View Control Bar. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. 18 In the Project Browser. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. right-click {3D}. and click Rename. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . under 3D Views. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 21 On the File menu.17 On the View Control Bar. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK. click Save. 19 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 20 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial.

you specify the location. 3 Select Cast Shadows. enter Summer Solstice. for City. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. date range. expand 3D Views. 10 Under Place. select Los Angeles. and time. MA. or multi-day solar study.Boston. leave the slider at 50.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 2 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. click click OK. For the Single-Day solar study.Creating Solar Studies .Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 9 In the Name dialog. and time range. date. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and click OK. CA. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 4 For Sun Position. Los Angeles. USA is selected. single-day. and click Duplicate. USA. click . Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. Click the Single-Day tab. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. click . Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. You can create a still. For this study. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you specify the location. expand Views (all). 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. For the Multi-Day solar study. .

click OK. 2008. and click OK. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. and click OK. click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click . select June 22. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click Duplicate. select December 22. 2 On the View Control Bar.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Los Angeles. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 16 In the Name dialog. For Time Range. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. enter 20 and press ENTER. on the Single-Day tab. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. ■ For Time Interval. 7 On the Options Bar. Under Frame. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 In this case. Los Angeles.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 19 On the File menu. 2008. select Winter Solstice. click Save. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles is selected. under Frame. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. for Date. click . for Sun Position. enter 10 and press ENTER. enter Winter Solstice. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. confirm that Summer Solstice. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 On the View Control Bar. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.

11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. . The solar study animation plays. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click To display the next sequential frame. approximately as shown. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. for Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Summer Solstice. 13 On the View Control Bar. click . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 14 On the Options Bar. on the Single-Day tab. .■ To display the next key frame. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click . . and click OK. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. Los Angeles. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click . click To play the animation from start to finish. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. double-click 01 Entry. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. under Floor Plans. click OK.

Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. expand 3D Views. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . Click and enter Dining. click . and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click . click Lines. approximately as shown. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. as shown.

NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. on the Single-Day tab. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 15 To hide the section box. and click OK. click OK. under Output Length. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. Los Angeles. verify that the value is set to 15. if necessary. select Frame Range. On the Annotation Categories tab. ■ For Frames per second. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 Click outside of the section box. as shown. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. select Section Boxes. and click OK. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. 12 In the drawing area. select the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and enter 5 to 50. clear Section Boxes. 11 To display the section box.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain.

select AVI Files. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you open each image. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. or frame. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Winter Solstice. and click OK. for Model Graphics Style. For Frames per second. To maintain the proportions of the frame. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. Click OK. and enter 5 to 10. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. of the animation separately. and click OK. click . under Output Length. For Files of Type. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. enter 450 in the first field (width). verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. Los Angeles. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . for Model Graphics Style. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. 3 For Sun Position. Under Format. 2 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ Under Format. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. To view the animation.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. For File Name.Los Angeles. verify that Hidden Line is selected. For Dimensions. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. on the Single-Day tab. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. select Frame Range. for Compressor.

or GIF. under 3D Views.■ For Dimensions. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. 8 Click Save.Los Angeles. BMP. or any single-frame format. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. For Files of Type.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. In this example. click the Desktop icon. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select PNG. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. TIFF. depending on the Frame Range. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. as shown: 9 On the File menu. click Save. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. For File name. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. enter 450 in the first field (width). such as JPEG. Click OK.

as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click OK. USA. On the Annotation Categories tab. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . For Time. MA. 8 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click OK.Los Angeles .Week Interval. select One week. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ .Boston. and on the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. for Sun Position. specify 2:00 pm. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for File name enter 2pm . clear Section Boxes. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. For Time Interval. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and click OK.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click the Multi-Day tab. and click Duplicate. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 Select the roof. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

such as East . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you mirror all model elements. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Click the Desktop icon. model views. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . select Full Frames (Uncompressed).15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for Compressor.West or North . In the Length/Format dialog. under Floor Plans. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. for File Name. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. and click Save. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. double-click 01 Entry.South. When you mirror a project. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. and annotations in non-drafting views. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. 17 On the View Control Bar.

see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 6 On the Standard toolbar. select the roof. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. Then.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. For additional information. 2 In the drawing area.West axis. under 3D Views. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog.West. right-click. and click OK. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. select East . The project is mirrored along the East . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 5 In the warning dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. In this exercise.

you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM.3 On the View Control Bar. click the Still tab. click . 8 For Sun Position. For example. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Still tab. specify 11:00 AM for time. 5 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and select Winter Solstice. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. click . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. Orienting to True North | 449 . NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and click OK. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. and click OK. 11 For Sun Position. 10 Under Date and Time. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. click Apply. click . 12 Under Date and Time. select Summer Solstice.

and select Winter Solstice. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. for Orientation. This process establishes the view setting to True North. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. double-click 01 Entry. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 18 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. select True North. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. and click Properties. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 14 On the View Control Bar. click OK. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 15 For Sun Position. click the Still tab. When a project is started. right click 01 Entry. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. the view settings must be set for True North. and click OK.

■ To establish the True North direction. Orienting to True North | 451 . click toward the top of the screen. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. as shown. The floor plan rotates in the view.

Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 32 On the View Control Bar. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Apply. select Project North. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. select Summer Solstice. select True North Orientation. 33 For Sun Position. and click OK. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Orientation. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. right-click.23 In the Project Browser. right-click 01 Entry. for Orientation. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. right-click. and click Rename. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click . 27 In the Rename View dialog. click the Still tab. and click OK. and click Element Properties. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. select True North. under 3D Views. right-click 01 Entry. enter True North Orientation.

click the Desktop icon. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. Orienting to True North | 453 .35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Single-Day tab. Click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. For Files of Type. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Los Angeles. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the Length/Format dialog. under Format. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. for Compressor. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Click Save. enter 600 in the first field. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. For File Name. click Summer Solstice. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Dimensions. verify that AVI Files is selected. and click OK. and click OK. click OK.

In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date and Time. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. under 3D Views. Rendered views do not have this limitation. In the Name dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and exporting it as a JPEG image. select Interior: Sun only. and click OK. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. under Settings. 2 In the Project Browser. Under Lighting. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. select Edit/New. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. For Sun. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. for Setting. under 3D Views. select Medium. select 12/22. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. and click OK. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. under Quality. (Show Rendering Dialog). click Render. This would include some exterior views and most interior views.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. Since a rendered image is temporary. and click Duplicate. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 1 In the Project Browser. and 2:00 PM. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. for Scheme. In this exercise. select Winter Solstice. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. capturing it. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. enter living area_winter solstice. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. click Export. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 In the Rendering dialog. click Save to Project. verify that JPEG Files is selected. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. click Desktop. and click Save. and click OK.

456 .

and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. and details. type. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Co-house. length.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. however. They include rendering. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. a consultant. elevations. sections. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. and section boxes. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. In this series of exercises. Using the pre-built building model. 457 . use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. In this tutorial. Other tools in the software. an outside reviewer. advanced model graphics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. you explore the stylistic approach. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. or the client. For the realistic approach. When organizing presentation graphics. linework. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. you can choose between realism and stylistics. Whether the audience is the general contractor.

change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a copy of the plan. you create a presentation floor plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.

Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click Rename. Cnst. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 2nd Flr. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click in the drawing area. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. exit the menu. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 .

and click Save. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.rvt. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. This turns off the visibility of all tags. this represents the view getting smaller. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 7 Under Visibility. and other annotations in this view. sections. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. dimensions. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click the Annotation Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. and clear DOWN Text. elevations. expand the Stairs category. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 11 In the Save As directory. Down Arrow. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. and Up Arrow. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. No annotations display in the view. 8 Click OK.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. UP Text. click the Scale control and select 1:100.

and select 1st Flr.rvt. select Boston. click the Place tab. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. If you select a different city. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. however. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. 2 On the View Control Bar. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. modify. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. on the Still tab. 1:00 PM. 9 For City. you can create. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. for Date and Time. 12 Click OK. select Cast Shadows. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 7 For Place. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. click (Shadows Off). specify 35. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. For Sun Position. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Sun and Shadow Settings. At that place. click OK. Time and Place. Within a project. ■ For Contrast. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. NOTE For this step.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. the darker the shadows. MA. specify 10/27. double-click it in the Project Browser. 6 Under Settings. you can select any city. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. click . and click OK. Cnst. The higher the number. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select By Date. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK. click (Shadows On). Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. under Settings. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. clear Ground Plane at Level. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. for Sun Position. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. . click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

and click to place it. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. and click Add View to Sheet. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. click Sheet. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. select Arch Portrait. The viewport displays at the cursor. 4 In the Views dialog. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. right-click the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 .Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and click View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not available. and notice the view title. click Add View.

13 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. for Show Title. 9 On the Options Bar. For this analytique. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Graphics. and click OK. click . click Edit/New. The viewport no longer displays a view title. and click Activate View. To accomplish this. select No. and click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click Duplicate. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation.

If necessary.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 20 On the Options Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. and select Chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. When you finish drawing the chain. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. click . select Invisible lines. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 22 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 18 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Filled Region. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click . you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click Edit/New. and the boundary of the region. click Region Properties. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. fill properties. TIP Use care when sketching this chain.

32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Duplicate. click . and click OK. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. under Graphics. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 25 In the Name dialog. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. for Sheet Name. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. scroll down. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click View Properties. for Fill Pattern. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. and click OK. enter Presentation. under Name. select Solid fill. enter Solid Black. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click OK. under Identity Data. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.rvt.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. right-click South. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

14 For Sun Position. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 9 Click OK. under Pattern Overrides. specify 2:30 PM. exit the menu. 11 On the View Control Bar. click . under Visibility. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click Copy of South. select By Date. click (Shadows Off). 16 In the Name dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Visibility. clear Visible. and click Rename. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. scroll up. and click OK. click in the Walls row. enter Presentation South Elevation. expand the Doors category. and click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Time and Place. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 12 Under Shadow.2 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 18 For Time. select Cast Shadows. under Settings. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click OK. under Elevations. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Model Categories tab. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Override. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 For Contrast. and clear Elevation Swing. click in the drawing area. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click Duplicate. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. specify 35. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.rvt. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 3 In the Views dialog. click Add View. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. and click Add View to Sheet. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

The viewport displays a view title. The view title no longer displays. select Viewport : Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.

double-click 1st Flr. for Scale.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.rvt. under Floor Plans. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Cnst. 4 Add the section shown below. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). select 1: 100. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Section. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.

8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 7 On the Options Bar. this view needs to be rotated 180°. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. click Callout. select 1 : 100. expand Sections (Callout 1). To fit correctly in the analytique. for Scale. and double-click Section 2. as shown. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.Section 2 is added to the building model. To accomplish this.

17 Under Visibility. click Override. double-click Presentation Section 2. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Pattern Overrides. clear Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 2. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click in the Walls row. 10 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. expand the Doors category. click the Model Categories tab. right-click Callout of Section 2. and click Rename. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. click Modify. scroll up. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. 15 Under Visibility.

click The crop regions no longer display. When you select the crop region. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. 20 Click OK. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 .■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. (Hide Crop Region). 22 On the View Control Bar. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.

specify the following: Under Shadow. click . 6 In the Name dialog. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The shadows do not offer much contrast. double-click Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Cast Shadows. Click Apply. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). click Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. and click OK. For Contrast. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. in the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).rvt. specify 35. ■ For Sun Position. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. In addition. 3 On the View Control Bar.

12 Proceed with the next exercise. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. for Silhouette style. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges. Click OK. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Silhouette Edges. specify 135°. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. was added to this training file for training purposes. specify 70°.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Directly. For Azimuth. Select Relative to View. click OK. For Altitude. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. NOTE The line style. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . click (Shadows On). You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles.

you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. select Section: Presentation Section 2. under Sheets (all).Presentation. and click to place the selected view. click Add View. double-click A105 . and click Add View to Sheet. 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Using a clock as a reference. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. To rotate an object. click (Rotate). The section needs to be rotated 180°. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. The view title no longer displays. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. select Viewport : Presentation.5 In the Type Selector. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. under Sections (Callout 1). In the steps that follow. you click to specify the start radius. and press Enter. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 2. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point.

double-click A105 . Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.Presentation. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The callout rotates 180°. under Sheets (all).

click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . and drag it up and to the left as shown.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. After applying the view template to a new section view. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.

and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. 4 In the View Templates dialog. you can simply apply the presentation view template. right-click Section 1. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . right-click Copy of Section 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation Section 1. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. click OK. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). and click Rename. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. enter Presentation. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. under Sections (Type 1).

for Rotation on Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View.Presentation. select Presentation.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. select 90° Counterclockwise. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. double-click A105 . Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . under Graphics. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Right-click the viewport. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click OK. The furniture. and click Deactivate View. 18 Right-click the viewport. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and elevation swings no longer display. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click Activate View. annotations. under Sheets (all). and click OK. select Viewport : Presentation. lighting fixtures. under Names. 12 In the Views dialog. 14 In the Type Selector.

484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . such as a tracery window or a column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484.

click Callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. as shown. After you add the callout.rvt. select the callout. click Modify. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 .

7 Select the crop region. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). 8 Right-click. and click View Properties. as shown. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. enter Presentation Callout. clear Annotation Crop. under Extents. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . Click OK. specify 22. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Views dialog.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click Add View. 14 In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). For Scale Value 1. select Viewport : Presentation. click Modify. select Custom. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. select Section: Presentation Callout. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Activate View. 15 On the Design Bar.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. When finished. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Region Properties. and click Deactivate View. click Filled Region. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. and move it to the position shown below. activate the viewport. under Sections (Callout 1). In the steps that follow. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. double-click Presentation Callout. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. click Edit/New.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and make adjustments as necessary. 23 On the Design Bar. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog.

select Solid fill.Presentation. 28 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Activate View. You do not have to replicate the image exactly.25 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click A105 . and click OK 3 times. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. for Fill Pattern. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Filled Region. click . sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. on the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. under Sheets (all). click Finish Sketch. When you are finished.

click . 32 On the Design Bar.31 On the Options Bar. click (Show Crop Region). 33 On the View Control Bar. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 34 Select the crop region. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and sketch the rectangle shown below. click Finish Sketch. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491.35 On the View Control Bar. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. click (Hide Crop Region). You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and click Deactivate View. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.

Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click (Shadows Off). Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click the Scale control. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.rvt. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and apply shadows to the views. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric. and click 1 : 200. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. in the list. Select 1st Flr. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. select Cast Shadows. 8 In the Name dialog. enter Isometric 1. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . For Sun Position. 14 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. and click OK. click . Select Relative to View. and click OK. specify 135°. Click OK. For Contrast. For Altitude. right-click Isometric. Cnst. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 2. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under Extents. under 3D Views. specify 35. A section box displays around the building model. For Azimuth. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. under 3D Views. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and click Rename. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. select Section Box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. select Directly. for Silhouette style. specify 45°. double-click Isometric 2. right-click Isometric 1. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Select Ground Plane at Level.

20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. as shown. Grips display on each face of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar.19 Select the section box. When you are finished. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor.

select Viewport : Presentation. 22 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. double-click Isometric 3. click Modify on the Design Bar. 25 To hide the section box. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. 23 In the Rename View dialog. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. When you are finished. 27 Select the section box. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. 31 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. under Sheets (all). 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. The section box no longer displays. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . enter Isometric 3. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. If desired. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. and click Rename. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click A105 . the stairs and railings may display. Next. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Presentation. On the Annotation Categories tab. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. and click OK.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and click OK. 29 To hide the section box. make a copy of the view. 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. you can adjust the plane location. under 3D Views.

select Viewport : Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. The filled region partially covers the view. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views.

On the Options Bar. 40 Click OK twice. for Fill Patterns. click Region Properties. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 35 Select the poche filled region.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. select Transparent. 42 Using the drawing tools. 36 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Edit/New. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 41 On the Design Bar. 39 For Background. and click Activate View. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. select Concrete. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . click Edit. This will make it easier to draw lines.

45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Click OK twice. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View.43 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 47 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. for Fill Pattern. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Edit/New. select Solid fill.

then you specify the eye direction and range. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. you add it to the presentation sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The view opens immediately. double-click 1st Flr. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Cnst. a cutaway perspective view.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Camera. you create the final view for the analytique.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.

Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. specify 35. select Silhouette Edges. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. select Cast Shadows. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify the following: Under Shadow. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Contrast. for Name. 6 On the View Control Bar. For Sun Position. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. for Silhouette style. click .

under Extents. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Select the section box. select Section Box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . and click OK. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. A section box now cuts through the building model.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image.

and click OK. click Size. under 3D Views.Presentation. clear Section Boxes. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 15 On the Options Bar. enter 165 mm. select Scale (locked proportions). and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. you must specify the actual size of the image. for Width. under Change. In the Type Selector. 18 On the View Control Bar. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. click (Hide Crop Region). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click A105 . 21 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .14 Select the crop region. under Sheets (all). 19 To hide the section box.

and click OK.Presentation sheet is not the active view. 6 In the Name dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . click Duplicate. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Text : Title. click OK. and click OK. specify a text size of 6 mm. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Duplicate. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. under Text.rvt. enter Title. click . 10 In the Name dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. click Text. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit/New. select a font. enter Description. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select the same font as the title. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. specify a text size of 40 mm. under Text. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Text : Description.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

In this tutorial. such as walls. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. After you import the SketchUp model. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. and roofs. curtain walls. 507 . that compose the building. you can easily add detail with Revit components. Once the model has been imported. you create a small building from the front mass form.

click OK. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. enter Import SketchUp. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click OK. select Auto-Detect. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. buildings. and click Save. select Preserve. For Files of type. or select from a list. For Import units. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. visible elements. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. Double-click the Common folder. enter SketchUp Model. For Colors. 6 In the Save As dialog. under Template file.skp. For Layers. 10 In the Name dialog. click Browse. Click the Sketchup file. you create a Revit Architecture project. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click OK.rte. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. for File name. and not in the library. click the Massing tab. 4 In the New Project dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 9 In the informational dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. select SketchUp Files. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select All. click Create Mass.

17 In the warning dialog. In a new project. and roofs. 14 On the View toolbar. depending on the complexity of the project. curtain walls. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. select Manual . 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Mass. such as walls. click the Close button. ■ ■ For Positioning. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. click . An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. select Level 1. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 .You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. For Place at level. Click Open.Center. Level 1 is the only choice. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan.

4 On the Options Bar. such as walls. and on the View Control Bar. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. After you create the building from the mass faces. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. that compose the building. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.400mm displays. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. verify Level 2 is selected. select the face so that it highlights in red.18 Proceed to the next exercise. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . You turn their visibility off to view only the building. and roofs. click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. for Level. curtain walls. verify Basic Roof: Generic . Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form.

verify that Select Multiple is selected. To see the new roof. A roof is created from the mass face.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. on the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click to display masses.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. on the View toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof.

11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. click Create Roof. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 12 On the Design Bar.

This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. for Loc Line.15 On the Design Bar.200mm displays. click roofs that you created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 16 On the View toolbar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Modify to end the command. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. select Core Face: Exterior. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar.

28 In the Type Selector. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 25 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System by Face.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. click to view only the walls and roofs.

32 On the View toolbar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.30 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 31 Using the same technique. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.

and select it. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create Roof. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Wall by Face. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Create System. click Roof by Face.35 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. select the other wall. click Curtain System. press TAB until the desired wall highlights.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . and select the mass face shown below. double-click Level 1. specify a point to place the camera. click Camera. Below the right corner of the view. 42 On the View toolbar. click to view the building that you have created. click Wall by Face. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. 43 Click to redisplay the masses.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. Click the frame to display its grips. as shown. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. roofs. to view only the walls. specify a point for the camera target. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The perspective view created by the camera displays. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. click your building in the view. 48 On the View toolbar.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

Click OK. click Modify. 50 On the Options Bar. click . Under Grid 2 Pattern. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. select Center.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar.

under 3D Views. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. double-click {3D}. and click Cancel to end the command. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.54 Select each roof to display its grips. and move the roof edges as shown below. 59 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D View 1. click Door. 55 Right-click. 56 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the Type Selector. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

and mullions. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. To change grids. you create a curtain system using the wall command. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you select the grid. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Unlike windows. panel. This affects the entire curtain system. you need to change the length of the wall. Like walls. and you can change these elements individually. grid lines.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. 525 . Like windows. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. you need to select a panel. to resize the system. click Training Files. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. For example. or you can use a specific curtain system command. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. and they are not windows. To switch panel types. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.

Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click Ground Floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This floor edge will be the entrance to the building.1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. click Wall.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 527 . and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser.

You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top constraint. and room bounding.11 Select the curtain system. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. Click OK. using curtain grids. top and base attachments. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. For Top Offset. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. enter 1200. and click (Properties).

24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 25 On the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click OK. click Modify. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 18 In the Project Browser. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. right-click Elevation 1 . Creating an Entrance | 529 . click Elevation. click Curtain Grid.a. under Floor Plans.

33 On the Design Bar. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. Click to create a vertical grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. one larger than the other. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Click to place another grid line. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. and SEVENTH FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. FIFTH FLOOR. select SECOND FLOOR. while pressing CTRL.26 While pressing CTRL. click Curtain Grid. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. FOURTH FLOOR. and click OK. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. SIXTH FLOOR.

Creating an Entrance | 531 . The two segments are removed. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then select the segment above it. click Add or Remove Segments. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and on the Options Bar. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. The segment line style changes to dashed. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 35 Select the left vertical grid line.Next. Instead of using the Door command. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them.

38 Using the same method. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. select One Segment. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 42 Place dimensions as shown. and lock them. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

click in any white space to exit the editor. Creating an Entrance | 533 . You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 43 Delete the dimensions. Use the following image as a guide. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.

Now.rfa. and click Wireframe. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. on the new curtain system you added. click Modify.Next. These panels schedule as doors. not as curtain panels. 55 In the Project Browser. 52 On the Type Selector. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Entrance Elevation. under Floor Plans. This changes the graphics style of the Next. . 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. They are part of the curtain panel category. 56 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click view. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. The panel changes to a double door. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. under Elevations. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 57 On the View Control Bar. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 54 On the Design Bar. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.

60 On the Type Selector. 65 On the View Control Bar. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. Creating an Entrance | 535 . click System Panel : Solid. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click . 63 Click OK twice. The glazed panels display in blue. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. and the solid panels display in white. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 With the panel still selected.

click Save As.68 On the File menu. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 2 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Mullion. select Entire Grid Line. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. select Grid Line Segment.rvt.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. however. You are going to change some mullion joins.6 On the Options Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. there are a few that you do not want. so you remove them next. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. select All Empty Segments. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. clickModify. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. 10 Delete the mullions below them.

The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. Finally. click Modify. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric.Two mullion join controls display. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Save the file. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 16 In the Project Browser. you can also right-click. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 14 Click the top mullion control. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids.

you add a curtain system using the wall command. (Arc passing through three points).Curved Curtain System In this lesson. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Top Constraint. Finally. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. click Wall. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Click OK. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. enter 1200. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. For Top Offset. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 4 In the Type Selector. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. under Floor Plans. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 1 In the Project Browser. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 7 On the Options Bar.

Divide the halves into quarters. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. eighths. click Curtain Grid. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. double-click East. Next. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. You are going to use one of these snaps points. and then sixteenths. you place grids on the system. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 14 In the Project Browser.

15 Zoom in to the cylinder. 18 In the Type Selector. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. 16 On the Design Bar. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. you change some panels in the system. Next. to filter out all 19 Save the file.300mm. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. select Basic Wall: Generic . Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. select the bottom layer of panels. click Modify. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.

click Lines. 11 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. clear Chain.rft. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. select Glass. 9 Select the extrusion. under Elevations. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 6 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. and click . for Depth. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 3 In the Project Browser. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Model Lines. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. . double-click Exterior. enter 100.

17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. right-click. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Curtain Panel . double-click FOURTH FLOOR.Pattern. and return to the project file. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . click 25 On the View toolbar. click Modify.rfa. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . All fourth floor panels are selected. 23 Right-click.Pattern. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. and save the family as Curtain Panel . and click Change Walls Orientation. 21 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. 24 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans.14 On the Design Bar.Pattern. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.rfa family.

right-click.Solid. under Floor Plans. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. All fifth floor panels are selected.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 29 In the Type Selector. 30 Save the file. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 27 In the Project Browser. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. All the panels change to the solid panel. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. select System Panel .

8 On the Design Bar. and select it. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. For vertical mullions. 1 In the Project Browser. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. double-click East. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. under Elevations. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files.rft. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ For Sides. Click again to specify the ending point. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. enter 8. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. click Lines. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . Select Radius. click Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. for Profile Usage. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. . 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). select Mullion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and return to the project file. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Modify. click Modify. click (SteeringWheels). double-click Southeast Isometric. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click Detail Component. it can be added as a mullion type. 28 On the View toolbar. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 19 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. After the new profile is loaded. 20 Select the detail component.detail. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Mullion. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. click Visibility.11 On the Design Bar.rfa family. and click Visibility. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 27 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. clear Coarse and Medium.rfa. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 17 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.rfa. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under 3D Views. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Click . 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. clear Fine. and click OK. click Training Files.

37 Click OK twice. 44 Save the file. select Circular Mullion for Family. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . and click OK.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select All Empty Segments. 40 On the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. You have placed more mullions than you want. for Profile. right-click. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 In the Project Browser. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. so you remove the unwanted ones. 33 Click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 43 Press DELETE. 36 Under Construction. under Floor Plans. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 38 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name.

This completes the exercise for adding mullions. select Defines slope. and press TAB. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. click Pick Walls. and you can click to select them all. 1 In the Project Browser. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. TIP To chain select all the walls. a storefront system. All the inside faces highlight. In this lesson. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 4 On the Design Bar. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. make custom curtain panels and mullions. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Options Bar. and a ruled curtain system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. you learned to create a curved curtain system.

14 On the Options Bar. click Modify.7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Mullion. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. under 3D Views. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Roof. enter 600. select Entire Grid Line. 18 Save the file. Sloped Glazings | 549 . This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. Click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. double-click Southeast Isometric. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Roof Properties.

6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Selector.Storefront System In this exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. select Unconnected for Height. 5 On the Options Bar. click Wall. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. and enter 2400.

The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 9 On the Design Bar. This specifies an exact length for the wall. even if the wall height changes. under 3D Views. For this wall. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 10 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. which is specified in the type.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. Storefront System | 551 . enter 10200 mm. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. To see how the grid layout is defined. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. 12 Select the storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. click Modify. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 Click the temporary dimension. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. click Edit/New. and click . This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.

or end. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. under 3D Views. 19 Select a curtain grid. 1 In the Project Browser. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. double-click Southeast Isometric. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. Angle. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. you find Number. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. In this exercise. By setting the Angle value. Justification. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. click Mullion. and Offset. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. center. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 Save the file. enter 15. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 16 Click OK. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. select All Empty Segments. see the Revit Architecture help.

Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 6 Click the highlighted line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. and highlight the model line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.3 On the View Control Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line.

554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .8 Select the highlighted line. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the panel. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. click Modify. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. Next. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created. and click . Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK.

and then eighths. quarters. and then eighths. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 16 In the Type Selector. right-click. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 18 Save the file. quarters. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. embed a curtain system inside another wall. select System Panel : Solid. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. and define a ruled curtain system. Finally.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.

556 .

and low sloped roofs. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you learn how to add fascia. In this lesson. click Training Files. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this tutorial. and soffits to the roofs that you create. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. mansard. including hip.rvt. You do not need to create the work plane. 557 . shed. In addition. you learn to create several different types of roofs. and open Metric\m_Roofs. gutters.Roofs 15 In this lesson. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. gable.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.1 In the Project Browser. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. centerline. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. expand Views (all). 4 Click OK. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 5 In the Go To View dialog. and click OK. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. and so on). click the blue square on the witness line. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. select Name. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. and double-click Level 1.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Lines. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. select Chain. 13 On the Options Bar.Next. sketch the roof profile.

and double-click Section 1. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). click Modify. expand Sections (Type 1). 19 On the Tools toolbar. and select the second wall. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Next. 18 Select the edge of the roof. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. expand Views (all). The roof should resemble the following illustration. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 21 In the Project Browser. press CTRL. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. press TAB.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click model.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Yes.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. Next. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. expand Floor Plans. sketch the roof footprint. expand Views (all). To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. m_Roofs. verify that Defines slope is selected. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . and double-click Garage Roof. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Pick Walls.

click Finish Roof. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. and on the Options Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click (Properties). The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 15 On the View toolbar. 11 Press CTRL. clear Defines slope. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. under Dimensions. click Modify. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. select both slope definition lines. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 8 On the Options Bar. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. click the model. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. By default. and click OK.

and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. clear Defines slope. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). press TAB. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. When you complete the roof. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

17 When you see the informational dialog. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 10 On the View menu. Next. 15 On the Options bar. Next. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . add new slope lines to the roof. 9 Using automatic snaps. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.6 Click to select all the walls. click (Rectangle). 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Finish Roof. click Lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch the chimney opening. click Modify.

click Pick Walls. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. m_Roofs.18 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. select Defines slope. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all).

Next. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click (Trim/Extend). 9 On the Tools toolbar. 11 To trim the first line segment. and click (Pick Lines). 7 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Lines. Next. clear Defines Slope. select the left vertical slope definition line. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. Next. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Roof Properties. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 16 On the View toolbar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click (SteeringWheels). 18 On the Design Bar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click Modify. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 17 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and click OK. 14 Under Constraints.

23 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.21 Click (SteeringWheels). use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). join the two remaining walls to the roof. Next. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.

Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. m_Roofs. press TAB. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Options Bar.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 9 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 300 for Overhang. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . 6 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. expand Views (all). 8 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical roof line. clear Defines Slope. enter 0 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click (Trim/Extend).rvt. click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Next.

572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click Modify. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 19 On the View toolbar. and press ENTER. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. m_Roofs. (SteeringWheels). 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. expand Views (all). and click OK. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 16 Under Constraints. you add a slope-defining line. expand 3D Views. click Roof Properties. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. select Defines slope. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. Next.rvt.

9 On the Tools menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 7 On the Options Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. click Ref Plane. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Before you can add slope arrows. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. 3 On the Options Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. expand Floor Plans. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Next. 4 In the Project Browser. you need to add two reference planes. add two new slope arrows.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. expand Views (all). 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). Next. 11 On the Design Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 12 On the Options Bar. click Modify. To help locate the position of each split. and enter 600 for Offset. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Slope Arrow. 14 On the Options Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 5 On the View menu.

and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. (Properties). 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. the adjacent eave heights must align. 3 On the Options Bar. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights.rvt. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them.15 to add the second slope arrow. enter 500 for Rise/1000. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. expand Views (all). and then click OK. m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. select Slope for Specify. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. When you sketch a hip roof. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 20 Under Dimensions. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Repeat steps 13 . click Edit. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. select both slope arrows. click Modify. and double-click Garage Roof. 18 Press CTRL. When eave heights differ. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and click OK. under Dimensions. select Defines Slope. 13 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Align Eaves. 12 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. on the File menu. select a method to align the eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 14 If you want to save your changes. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. (Properties). When aligning eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Next.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. The eave lines display with a dimension. click Save As. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 5 On the Options Bar.

3 Select the roof and. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.rvt. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). (Properties).Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Elevations. and double-click North. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Constraints. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.

16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. and select the remaining three lines. click Finish Roof. and then select Defines slope. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 7 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar.6 On the View toolbar. click . 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 10 On the Options Bar. press TAB. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Pick Lines). click Modify. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Next. expand Floor Plans. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 .

You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. click mansard roof. you add a roof to a building shell. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. After you add the roof. click Save As. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof.17 On the View toolbar.rvt. click Training Files. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.

click Pick Walls. double-click Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Defines slope is not selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. under Floor Plans.

Insulation on Metal Deck . click (Trim/Extend). 7 On the Tools toolbar. select Steel Truss . for Type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties.EPDM. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.Because the walls are not continuous. click Finish Roof. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.

You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. double-click Roof. and click to select it. double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. The roof has been created. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. under Floor Plans. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . click (Draw Split Lines).

17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 20 Using the same method. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 18 Move the cursor down. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center.

Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . Next. on the Options Bar. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. 23 On the Options Bar. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. (Add points). click (Modify Sub-Elements). You modify the points individually.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. In this exercise. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.

and press ENTER. enter -2''. for the dimension. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

and press ENTER. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. and select all of the roof edges. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. enter 4''. and on the Options Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 Select the roof slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 .27 Press and hold CTRL. for Elevation. click (Properties). click Modify. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. and Soffits on page 586. and soffits. on the File menu. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. select Variable. gutters. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. click Edit. Creating Fascia. In some cases this type of slope is desired.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. for Structure. and Soffits In this lesson. 35 Click OK 3 times. you learn how to create roof fascia. Creating Fascia. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. gutters. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. and soffits in Revit Architecture. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. under Construction. 37 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. Gutters. After you create a roof. By making the insulation layer variable. Gutters. The entire slab is sloped. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 36 View the results in the section view. for the Thermal/Air Layer. you can easily create its fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Edit/New.

and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click (Properties). 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 3 Press CTRL. click Training Files. under Construction. 8 In the Name dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. and click OK. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . and click Open.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 5 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Duplicate. and click OK twice. and open Common\c_Condominium. enter Built-up Fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. click Training Files.rvt. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Properties). click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Gutters on page 588.rvt. c_Condominium. 2 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.

select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click Edit/New. Creating Soffits on page 590. . 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK three times. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. click Duplicate. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. Creating Gutters | 589 . and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.3 In the Properties dialog. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. under Construction. and click OK. click in the Value field for Material. 10 Click to place the gutter.

1 In the Project Browser. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Roof. click Pick Roofs.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. c_Condominium. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand Views. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.

and then select the soffit to join them. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D. 8 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. Creating Soffits | 591 . 7 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry.4 Select the roof. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Finish Sketch.

9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the File menu. click Save As.

select Square meters. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. click Project Units. Finally. and open Common\c_Area. 593 . you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 3 Under Area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Training Files. select Millimeters.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. your values will be different. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Unit Suffix. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.rvt. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. In the final exercise. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. under Length. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. select mm. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. If you are using metric units.

View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Units dialog. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. click Settings. right-click in the Design Bar. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. For Unit Suffix. expand Views (all). the system-computed height defaults to the level. select m2.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. Click OK. or 0. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select 2 decimal places. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click OK. expand Floor Plans. These schemes define spatial relationships. it is not necessary in this exercise. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click the Area Schemes tab. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. click the Room Calculations tab. 9 Click Cancel. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. and click Room and Area.

11 In the New Area Plan dialog. 12 When the informational dialog displays. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Click OK. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. you must select one of the reference lines. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. under Views (all). Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 .Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. If you select No. To modify the area. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). you must manually add these boundary lines. click Area Plan. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. rather than the area tag. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. forming a closed loop. When you select Yes in this dialog. click Area. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. click Area Plan. Click OK. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. Next. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. If you do not select this option. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. and store area. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. When you add area boundary lines. 21 On the Options Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. When you pick the walls. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. common areas. you can either draw them or pick them. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. click Area Boundary. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height.

Select Office area for Area Type. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. and click to select the area. click ■ ■ . 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. click Area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click Modify. 27 On the Options Bar.23 On the Design Bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 .

click Area. click ■ ■ ■ . 31 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK.■ Click OK. Select Office area for Area Type. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 29 On the Design Bar. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 32 On the Options Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall.

■ Click OK. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Store Area for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. 35 Add an area to the building model core. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. enter Core for Name.

rvt. In the next exercise. click Save. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and click to place the legend. and click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.Notice that within the two store areas. In this exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 37 On the File menu. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.

3 When the dialog displays. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 7 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. select Areas (Rentable). Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. select Area Type and click Add. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. and click OK. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the New Schedule dialog.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

and floors. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. In this tutorial. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. If you modify a massing face. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. floors. you can specify the view to display massing elements. 603 . you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. You assign the default wall. At any time. After creating mass floors. and perimeter information. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. roofs. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roofs. floor. volume. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. curtain systems. or both. you then need to update the building face. After you make building elements. building elements.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. the building model uses those element types to define the walls.

4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Create Mass. and cutting geometry. under Floor Plans. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Massing. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Level 1. sweeps.

Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. under Floor Plans. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. (Pick Lines). Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Materials dialog. click the value for Material. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Extrusion End. (Line). under Constraints. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 16 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. under Views (all). for Name. click (Default 3D View). click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Extrusion Properties. enter 25000. click 18 On the Options Bar. select Mass (Opaque). 8 On the Design Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter 1550 mm. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. double-click Level 1. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Offset. under Materials and Finishes. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click . and click OK. click Lines.

The second form is on top of the first form. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). click Extrusion Properties. 21 On the Design Bar. enter 25000. double-click {3D} to see the results. 26 In the Project Browser.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. highlight the larger form. 30 In the drawing area. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. double-click West. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. under Elevations (Building Elevation). for Extrusion Start. and click OK. TIP If necessary. click the value for Material. select Pick a plane. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. and click . click Finish Sketch. and click OK. press TAB to highlight the entire face. select Mass (Transparent). for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. enter 27500. and click OK. under Views (all). 23 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. for Extrusion End.

Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . and clear Chain. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 34 On the Options Bar.31 Click to select the face. and click to select the line start point. click (Arc passing through three points). 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Pick Lines). click (Draw). and on the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. Next. click Lines.

double-click East. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. (Line). click Modify. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 45 In the Project Browser.TIP If you do not see this option. 41 On the Edit toolbar. under Views (all). click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 39 On the Design Bar. click Edit Top. click (Move). click the arrow next to the drawing options. and delete the vertical construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu.

51 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. click Blend Properties. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 50 On the Design Bar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. and click OK. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.48 On the Options Bar. (Arc passing through three points). and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 52 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. 53 On the View toolbar. for Material. In this exercise. click (Default 3D View).

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. and select Chain. select the mass. double-click Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 7 Using the same technique. 2 In the drawing area. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. under Views (all). 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 4 On the Options bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane.rvt. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. click Lines. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click Ref Plane. m_Massing_Start. click (Line). and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. as shown. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted.

on the View Control Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. When sketching each extrusion.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click (Default 3D View). and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. enter 0. 14 Under Constraints. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. snap the corners to the intersections. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 17 On the View toolbar. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. for Extrusion End. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. In this exercise. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 15 Click OK. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing.

double-click Level 1. m_Massing_Start. and click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . select a point below the mass elements. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. under Floor Plans. click Sketch 2D Path. ■ For the radius. 3 On the Design Bar.

click (Default 3D View). click Lines.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 8 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. and click Edit. click Finish Path. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click (Rectangle). 11 On the Options Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. 6 On the Design Bar. click Profile 1. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. as shown.

Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion.13 On the Tools toolbar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click (Align). and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click Profile 2. click Finish Profile. and press ESC. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 17 Using the same method.

under Materials and Finishes. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. and click . click Finish Swept Blend. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 23 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. 22 Click OK twice.18 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). click <By Category>. click Finish Profile. 21 In the Materials dialog.

25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. click Finish Mass. you create new family types from a mass family file. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. In this exercise. Finally. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise.rvt. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. You then load that mass family file and others into a project.24 On the Design Bar. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson.

click Training Files. enter 12000 mm. and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Height. enter 18000 mm. enter 15000mm. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. click New. enter 18000 mm. and click OK. enter 46000mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. 9 Click OK. and for Name. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 3 In the Name dialog. for Depth. click Family Types.rfa. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . enter 9000 mm. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. for Width. for Depth. and click Apply.rfa. 8 For Width. and click OK. for Height. 5 Click New.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. and for Name. enter 68000 mm. enter 11000 mm. and click OK. In this exercise. under Other. enter 6000 mm. for Depth. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 For Width. for Height. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. 7 Click New. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm.

rfa. on the View toolbar. 1 If not already selected.rfa.rfa family files. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 2 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files. click Place Mass. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. under Floor Plans. 6 Open the Box-Training. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. and Triangle. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 8 In the Type Selector.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. under Views (all). 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Arc Dome.rfa. 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Site. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. click Training Files. Semi Barrel Vault. as shown. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rvt. You also load other existing mass families and place them.

14 In the Type Selector. 20 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Place Mass. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. select the 3 boxes. click Modify. click Modify. 17 Press CTRL. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 11 Select the box. click (Element Properties). 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. enter 90 for Angle. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. as shown. click Modify. specify Mass (Transparent). 23 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the mass. select the triangle. click Place Mass. specify Mass (Opaque). 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 25 In the drawing area. select Rotate after placement. and click OK twice. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . for the Material parameter.

specify Mass (Transparent). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Opaque). 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 29 In the Type Selector. click (Default 3D View). 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 33 On the View toolbar. for the Material parameter. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.26 Select the triangle. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . for the Material parameter. and click (Element Properties). select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click OK twice.

NOTE When you join geometry. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.rvt file. In the next exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. (Join Geometry). Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click (Default 3D View). In this exercise. you join these mass elements. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise.

on the Edit toolbar. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 4 Select the triangle. click (Mirror). under Views (all). double-click Site. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing .3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.

8 On the Options Bar. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. (Join Geometry). Joining Mass Elements | 623 . 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Default 3D View). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. for Axis. enter SM. 17 Press ESC to see the result. and then select the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click (Draw). and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. as shown. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection.

Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.In this exercise. and select the triangle mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.rvt. do not clear the check mark. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . 1 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click (Add to Design Option Set). you joined mass elements together. 2 On the Window menu. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. (If Design Options is already selected. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.

Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). enter 90. 14 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 13 On the Design Bar.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Rotate after placement. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. 10 On the Options Bar. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. and click OK. click Modify. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. clear Curved. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. for the Material parameter. under Floor Plans. 8 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Sloped (primary). for Angle. 7 In the Type Selector. 17 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown.

specify Mass (Transparent). clear Sloped. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. under Views (all). 23 On the View Control Bar. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click OK twice. 20 In the drawing area. under Elevations. select the three arc domes. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing .TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. TIP To find the correct shapes. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 28 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click {3D}. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 22 In the Project Browser. for the Material parameter. click (Add to Design Option Set). 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. and click OK. click Modify. under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. select Curved. double-click North. and watch the status bar. and click (Element Properties). While pressing CTRL.

34 Close the warning that displays. select Curved from the Design Option menu. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 35 On the File menu. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. select Curved and. under Option. click (Design Options). Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 31 Click the value for Design Option. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. In this exercise. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click the Design Options tab. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. and click OK.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. you placed mass elements into Design Options. and click Close. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click Make Primary. you can make it the primary option.

you pick massing faces to create walls. click (Pick Faces).Brick on CMU. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. select Wall Centerline. click Training Files. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 6 On the Options Bar. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 2 On the View toolbar. and for Loc Line. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 In the Type Selector.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.rvt. select Basic Wall: Exterior .

select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 5. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . under Views (all). 8 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 15 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face.

19 In the Project Browser. If desired. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). double-click Level 9. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. click Wall by Face. 20 On the View Control Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 21 On the Design Bar. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing .

double-click {3D}. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. select all levels. perimeter.In this exercise. under Views (all). click Mass Floors. When you select levels. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and Walls. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Modify. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Curtain Systems. and exterior surface area.rvt. 4 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. clear Curtain Panels. volume.

and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Modify. click Mass Floors. 11 On the Options Bar. select Levels 1-4. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast.

NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view.14 On the Options Bar. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). click Mass Floors. 15 Press CTRL. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog.

select Floor Area. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Available fields. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. schedules can be created using the mass floors. select Mass Floor. press and hold SHIFT. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. and select Level.rvt. Floor Perimeter. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order).In this exercise. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Floor Volume. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Floor Area. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. under Category. and click Add. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. enter Retail. for Sort by. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . select Mass: Family and Type. for Usage. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. and click OK. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mass: Family and Type. click Edit. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Other. After you assign usage. and click Move Up until Level is listed second.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Remove. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. under Scheduled fields (in order). 13 With Usage selected. 14 Select Level. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. for Fields.

enter Retail (instead of Hotel). select Usage. for Field formatting. under Fields. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. under Other. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . under Other. and select Grand totals.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Level. and click Rename. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Filter tab. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Sort by. and click Properties. and click OK. for Filter by. for Then by. select Usage. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 27 Click OK twice. for Filter. and plan views. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. click Edit. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. for Filter. 24 In the Project Browser. select Floor Area. and click OK. 23 In the Rename View dialog. 16 On the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals. enter Hotel. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. in the field under Filter by. elevation. and in the field below. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. the floor area. 1 In the Project Browser. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model.rvt. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. The mass floor schedules list.In this exercise. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created mass floor schedules. you pick massing faces to create roofs. floor perimeter. by level. click Roof by Face.

and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create Roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.400mm. select Basic Roof : Generic . Your model should now look as shown. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.

9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. Curtain Systems. select Curtain Panels. click Create Roof. and click OK. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected.8 Using the method you just learned. 13 Using the same method. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. in the Type Selector. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. and Walls. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create System. 5 Press CTRL.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 4 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.rvt. click Curtain System by Face. 6 On the Options Bar.

642 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Using the same method.

click Create System. 11 Using the same method.9 On the Options Bar. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. you change the size of an existing mass family.rvt.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise.

clear Exclude Design Options. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. double-click Site.1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click (Element Properties). Floors. Next. Curtain Systems. under Floor Plans. click Visibility/Graphics. clear Curtain Panels. for Width. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . under Views (all). you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. click Modify. Roofs. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. enter 30000. and Walls. and then click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 7 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View menu.

11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 646 | Chapter 17 Massing .10 Open the 3D view to see the result. In the next steps. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. double-click Level 1. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. you want to select the smaller one. click (Default 3D View). press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Remake. 16 On the View toolbar. click OK. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here.TIP To select the curtain wall. Also. 17 Select the roof as shown.

19 Select the arc dome curtain system. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .18 On the Options Bar. click Remake. and click Remake.

you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities.rvt. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. you changed the size of an existing mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.20 In the Project Browser. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Massing only. 9 Select Mass.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. click All to select all categories. right-click {3D}. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Project Browser. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 Rename the view 3D . under 3D Views.

If desired. to the building shell.In this exercise. You might create the model shown. This concludes the massing tutorial. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof.

652 .

By grouping objects. In this exercise. place. In another exercise. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. After you create a model group. In this tutorial. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and modify repetitive units. you not only simplify their placement.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. When you make changes to a nested group. the host group is also updated automatically. You mirror one instance of the group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you also simplify the modification process. For example. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. 653 . or with those working on a different project. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. hotel rooms. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and typical office layouts. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. all instances in the building model are updated. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying. Creating. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.

expand Views (all).rvt. click Training Files. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. enter ZR. 2 Click in the drawing area.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. and double-click First Floor. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

select the center control for the group origin. click Modify.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

expand Model. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . click Modify. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click Create Instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. under Groups. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.

15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror). clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .

21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated. one mirrored. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. click Modify.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. as shown. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar.

Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. When you finish editing. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Save As. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. and click to select it.rvt. and click Save. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group | 661 .Save the training file 22 On the File menu. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group In this exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. press TAB to highlight the wall. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.

press TAB.). and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. click Modify. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE To display an excluded element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). 7 Click (Group Member. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar.3 Click (Group Member. and click member to group instance.). 4 Move the cursor over the door. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 10 In the Type Selector.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Wall. 13 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 663 . click Modify.127mm. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Basic Wall : Generic . clear Tag on Placement. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Door. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. move the cursor to the left. 14 In the Type Selector.

All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Modify. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 21 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the drawing area.17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. In edit group mode. move the cursor up. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening.

29 On the group editor toolbar. under Constraints. Nesting Groups | 665 . enter 1000. 26 Select the opening. and click OK. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. (Element Properties). Nesting Groups In this exercise. click Finish. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. created in an earlier lesson. click 28 For Base Offset. you add the Typical Kitchen group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. enter 2134. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. for Unconnected Height. and on the Options Bar. which acts as the host. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

in the Project Browser. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click (Add to Group).rvt. under Floor Plans. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Edit Group. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 5 In the drawing area. select the Typical Kitchen group.

Nesting Groups | 667 . double-click Second Floor. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Press TAB. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 7 On the group editor toolbar. select the wall between the folding doors. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. and each of the bifold doors.

Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. and filled regions. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as door and window tags. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.rvt. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you add door tags to a group. double-click First Floor. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. such as text.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click Finish Sketch. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and select a point below the left elevator. 7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 4 On the Options Bar.

and on the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. 16 In the drawing area. click to add an arc leader. click Text.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Enter Tile. click (Group). as shown. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and click OK. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.

click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Groups. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. and click Create Instance. Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. double-click Second Floor. click Modify. under Floor Plans. expand Detail. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.

click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. double-click First Floor.manner that a drawing component can be added. 5 On the Design Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. click Modify. clear Leader. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

for Attached Detail Group Name. under Floor Plans. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click Check None. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Group). 11 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . click (Filter Selection). double-click Second Floor. and click OK. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. select Door Tags.

click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Place Detail. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. and click OK. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. therefore. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags.

browse to the Desktop. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. In this case. click Modify. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save Group. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. A warning dialog displays. verify that Same as group name is selected. click OK. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. for Create new. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. accept the default template file. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. and expand Model. verify that Project is selected. 5 In the New Project dialog.rvt. expand Groups. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. under Groups\Model. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Create Instance. click Desktop. and click Save. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . and click Open. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 For File name. 12 On the Design Bar.

20 On the Options Bar. click Use Existing. verify that Attached Details is selected only. click Bind. click Training Files.rvt. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. and the link is removed. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. select the linked Revit model. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Link. When a group is converted to a link. click Modify.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and click OK.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 17 On the Design Bar. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Remove Link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 18 In the Project Browser. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 24 In the message dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. expand Revit Links.

In the final exercises. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. 677 . You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and walkways. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. convert the data to a table. and then modify the data. you add a building pad to the site.Site 19 In this tutorial. You add property lines manually. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. islands.

678 | Chapter 19 Site . 4 On the Options Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. In the second part of this exercise. and open Metric\m_First_Project. This project file was created using the default metric template. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Using the first method.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. click Point.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. expand Views (all). and double-click Site. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and click Site. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Toposurface.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . Use the following illustration as a reference. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.

Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. click Finish Surface. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 12000mm. click Site Settings. enter 1500mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. under Additional Contours. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 12 On the Settings menu. under Increment. and click OK. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 11 On the Design Bar. 15000mm.8 On the Options Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.

click to delete it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. on the Standard toolbar.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 18 In the Project Browser. enter 1000mm. click (Default 3D View). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. (SteeringWheels). modify the level names and elevations. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 14 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). click to view it at various angles. 15 On the View Control Bar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click the elevation value. click Modify. and press ENTER. 19 On the Design Bar. and double-click South. Before importing the contour data. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 16 On the View toolbar.

For Colors. rename the level Base Site Elevation. under Views (all). Click Open. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. For Layers. click Pin Position. under Floor Plans. Verify that Current view only is not selected. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 29 Select the imported topography. it is considered an import symbol. click Training Files. and press ENTER. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. and click OK. Until it is exploded. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 30 On the Edit menu. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. and press ENTER. select Preserve. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 28 On the Design Bar.21 Click the Level 2 text. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . click Yes. select Specify. double-click Site. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser. rename the level Basement.

clear C_INDX. click Modify. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. select it. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. click Visibility/Graphics.31 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Toposurface. and click OK. 32 On the View menu. when the edges highlight. click the Annotation Categories tab. 36 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. clear Elevations. 34 Under Visibility. When you select the import symbol.

684 | Chapter 19 Site .The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Using the first method. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. click Finish Surface. click (SteeringWheels). Adding Property Lines In this exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.rvt. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. name the project Site-in progress. 40 On the View toolbar. you add property lines using two methods. click (Default 3D View). Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. and click Save. 39 On the Design Bar. Using the second method. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 42 On the View toolbar. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image.

sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Site-in progress. Select and delete the right vertical line. Click Modify. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Lines.rvt. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. under Floor Plans. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. select Create property lines by sketching. On the Design Bar. click Lines. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines | 685 . click Property Line. do so before continuing.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state.

13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click OK. on the Standard toolbar.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 9 In the warning dialog. and click OK. click 12 On the Design Bar. select Edit Table. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. A warning dialog is displayed. add an arc line on the right. 6 On the Design Bar. to delete them. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. click Property Line. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select the lines. when they highlight. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.

The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 19 In the Tags dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 15 Starting in Row #1. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. This means there is no gap in the property lines.14 In the Property Lines dialog. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 16 Click OK. click to place the property lines. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. If the gap is not closed.

31 Click File menu ➤ Save. The tags display more prominently in this view. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 30 On the View Control Bar. you created two sets of property lines.20 Click Load. 25 Under Visibility. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. this project file is required in its current state. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 27 On the Options Bar. In the final step. right-click in the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category.dwg and click OK. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . click to place it. click Visibility/Graphics. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click the Imported Categories tab. click Training Files. clear Leader. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. Before adding property line segment tags. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 23 On the View menu. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In this exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. In the next exercise. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 In the Tags dialog. and click OK.rfa. and click Drafting.

0mm. select Topography. click New. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. under Contour Line Display. and click OK. In the Object Styles dialog. click Site Settings. enter 1000. Site-in progress. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation.rvt. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 7 Click OK. 2 On the Settings menu. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. select Dash dot. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. Under Line Pattern. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. click Object Styles. select Working Contour. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Under Line Color. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours. Under Subcategory. select Single Value. for Subcategory. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . select a shade of Brown. enter the name Working Contour. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Under Range Type.

you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. such as material. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. and islands. In this exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. and islands. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. The next exercise requires a new training file. parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. The object style subcategory. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. Working Contour.11 Click OK. you create subregions in order to define roads.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 .rvt. click Training Files. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Subregion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. 2 On the Design Bar. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. and open Metric\m_Site. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Although the exact dimensions are not important. try to replicate the location and proportion. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. click Lines. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Identity Data.NOTE In the Metric training file. 6 In the Materials dialog. click Properties. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Parking for Name. 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Site . under Materials and Finishes. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click to open the Materials dialog. click the value for Material. 692 | Chapter 19 Site .Tarmacadam for Name. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography.

Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.Tarmacadam. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. and double-click Topography Schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. expand Schedules/Quantities. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.9 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Edit Boundary. double-click Site. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. As you create new subregions. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . they display within this schedule.

Within each subregion. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 16 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Notice that the project area has increased. click Subregion. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 18 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. In this training project. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. Delete overlapping lines. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser.

27 In the Element Properties dialog.Grass for Name. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and click OK. select Site . 29 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 24 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.23 In the upper-right parking area. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. under Schedules/Quantities. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Grass for Name. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 26 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. click the value for Material. and click to open the Materials dialog. enter Island . under Identity Data.

32 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island Grass. Using the techniques learned in previous steps.31 In the Project Browser. click Subregion. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. You must sketch each region separately. click Lines. Notice that the schedule has been updated. double-click Site. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 34 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Site .Grass. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule.walkway. Name the subregion Walkway. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities.

click Finish Sketch. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. 37 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. there is still only one toposurface. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. double-click Topography Schedule.

rvt. and click Save. double-click Site. When you use the grading tool. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 2 Select the toposurface. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Site tutorial-in progress. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . this project file is required in its current state. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Grading the Toposurface on page 698.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. Using Phasing on page 761. click Graded Region. A warning dialog is displayed. 8 Select the topographic surface. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. select Copy Internal Points. see the tutorial. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click (Element Properties). stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. and click OK.3 On the Options Bar. and click Select and Edit. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Notice that the toposurface displays differently. under Phasing. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. select Existing for Phase Created. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. click Modify.

The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE.

Grading the Toposurface | 701 . and new. demolished.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. 11 On the View Control Bar.

13 Press DELETE. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Point. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 18 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click (Default 3D View). The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 15 On the Options Bar. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. specify New Construction for Phase. under Phasing. only the original toposurface displays. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you add a building pad. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.20 On the View toolbar. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . click View Properties. you can delete it. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. and delete it. 23 Select the toposurface. Therefore. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. (SteeringWheels). click to view it at various angles. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click OK. click View Properties. specify Existing for Phase. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Only the graded topography displays. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. you create a building pad. under Phasing. this project file is required in its current state. 24 On the View menu. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise.

The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. the Pick Walls command is active.rvt. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE By default. If you have an existing building model. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 2 On the View Control Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 6 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. click Pad. click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.

TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. click (SteeringWheels). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 On the View Control Bar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. click (Default 3D View). this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Site Components on page 706. Notice the new building pad. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 8 On the View toolbar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 On the View toolbar. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

click Parking Component. 3 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. double-click Site. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.Adding Site Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.90 deg. 5 On the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. and select the parking space.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Adding Site Components | 707 . Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. click (Default 3D View).

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 12 In the Type Selector.9 On the View toolbar. click Site Component. Notice the new parking spaces. choose any tree type. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. click (SteeringWheels). 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

14 On the View toolbar. 15 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 709 . click (Default 3D View). NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. In the following illustration. click (SteeringWheels). Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

under Floor Plans. click Apply.rvt. and click OK. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. click Tag All Not Tagged. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. this project file is required in its current state. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. click Hidden Line. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the View menu. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. double-click Site. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Site tutorial-in progress. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

as shown: 10 Using the same method. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 .Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. 8 On the Options Bar. to position the shoulder of the leader. Click again to the left to position the leader. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the following exercise. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Click up and to the left. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. outside of the site.

712 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 Press and hold CTRL.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. click Modify. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar.

you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 14 On the Design Bar.■ Clear Leader. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. this project file is required in its current state. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 .

This closes all the views except the parking schedule. select Mark. under Space. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.rvt. 10 In the Project Browser. select Type. click Schedule/Quantities. 13 In the Parking Schedule. and click Add. click the Fields tab. select Parking for Category. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 Under Fields. 9 On the Window menu. 6 Click the Formatting tab. The parking schedule is displayed. number the first three spaces consecutively. click Tile. under Floor Plans. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 4 Under Available fields. enter Size. 5 Under Available fields. under Views (all). Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Mark. Site tutorial-in progress. enter Space. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 12 In the Site plan. and click Add. click Close Hidden Windows. 11 On the Window menu. and under Heading. and click OK. If necessary. and under Heading. 7 Under Fields. select Type.

Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. 14 In the Parking Schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. under Space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . finish numbering the remaining spaces.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically.

716 .

use Element Borrowing. In this tutorial. called Worksharing. you specify an active workset. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. A workset is a collection of building elements. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Elements specific to a view. they cannot make changes to it. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. All other team members can view this workset. you must first enable Worksharing. such as walls. To make a workset editable. such as annotations and dimensions. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. doors. and click Editable. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. you can select which worksets are open or closed. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. go to the Worksets dialog. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. You can enable Worksharing for any project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. After the project is shared. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Working in a shared project In a shared project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. floors. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. however. stairs. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. select the desired workset. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. When you are working on a shared project. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. and so on. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Using Worksharing. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 .

you may want to create separate worksets for each portion.dialog. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. When setting up Worksharing. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Instead. You should have at least one workset for each person. Experience has shown that. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. In a multi-story structure. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. not including the Project Standards. In most projects. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. such as a tenant interior. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. and View worksets. for a typical project. Shared Levels and Grids. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. In the next exercise. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. After learning the fundamentals. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. In the lessons and exercises that follow. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.

a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. designers work in teams. if a workset named Interior was created. On this tab. When you create a new workset. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. By subdividing the project based on these task roles.Team member roles Typically. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. When creating the new worksets. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. As new members create worksets for their own use. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. each team member has control over a portion of the design. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. with each assigned a specific functional task. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Regardless of the default setting. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. For example. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view.

When you save to the central file. Therefore. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. When you save locally (to your local file). you should then save to your local file. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you make that workset editable by you. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. However. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. proceeds as usual. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. When you save to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When finished or at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. however. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. This is called “Selective Open. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Generally. the file is saved as the central file. within the local file. After saving to the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. On the Options Bar. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. they are not propagated to the rest of the team.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. As you work. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. your changes propagate to the entire team. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. your changes are saved. This makes them available to other team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset.

reload the latest changes from the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. When working remotely. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. using VPN. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. if you know who checked out the required workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. save to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. you should check out the Materials workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. and then save the local file. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. for instance. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. and make that workset editable. To do this. make any required worksets editable. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. In this situation. In this instance. Alternatively. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. In the next exercise.

Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. click Worksets. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. click Training Files." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and notice all are editable by you. and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Your username displays as the present owner. When you enable worksharing. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. The Worksets dialog displays. under Show. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 3 In the Worksets dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.

■ 5 Under Show. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. and click OK. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. click New. When you initially activate Worksharing. For example. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. clear Families. 9 Click New. expand Views (all). In this simple training project. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 13 In the Rename dialog. You do. 17 On the Options Bar. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. and Views. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. click OK. it is better to make them visible by default. another is assigned the interior layout. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Because the interior walls appear in many views. For training purposes. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. In this training file. select Workset1. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". In this case. 8 Click OK. clear Visible by default in all views. you can rename the default workset. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. type the name Exterior Shell. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. under Identity Data. 16 In the drawing area. however. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. currently named Workset1. 14 In the Worksets dialog. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. expand Floor Plans. 11 In the Worksets dialog. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. click . Only User-Created worksets should display.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Therefore. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 12 Click Rename. imagine four users including yourself. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . a small number of team members are working on the building model. and double-click Level 1. Project Standards.

23 Select all of the interior elements. under Identity Data. click . 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 20 Select one of the interior walls. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 24 On the Options Bar.19 Click OK. under Identity Data. including the interior doors. select Interior Layout for Workset. and walls. and click OK. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click the Worksets tab. select Interior Layout for Workset. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click . 26 On the View menu. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. stairs. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner.

enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 34 In the drawing area. click Save As. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . click Close. you enabled Worksharing on a project. double-click Level 2. 44 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics. Now that you have created the central file. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 32 Select Interior Layout. 33 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 38 In the Save As dialog. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. select all of the interior elements of the building model. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 35 On the Options Bar. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. make sure you remember the location of this central file. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 42 On the right side of the dialog. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. click . under Floor Plans. In this exercise. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. If any interior elements remain. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 39 Click Save. 41 In the Worksets dialog. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 30 On the View menu. under Views (all). If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 43 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. click Non Editable.

and click OK. Before working on the model. 2 In the Open dialog. please do so before continuing. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. Next. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. check out worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. click Options. click Save As. 13 On the Window menu. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. expand Views (all). select Interior Layout. 12 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Name. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. you create your local file. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. expand Floor Plans. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and select Specify. 7 In the Save As dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. make modifications to the building model. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. In this case. You have created a local file which is for your use only. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In addition. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and click Save. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. and select Yes for Editable.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. If you have not yet completed the exercise. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 4 Click Open. click Worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. click Open. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets. select the central file. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 6 On the File menu.

Because this element is not owned by another user. In the Worksets dialog. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. click Worksets. under Identity Data. On the Options Bar. The upper exterior wall should still be selected.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If this is selected. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. 22 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 23 On the File menu. you can still edit this wall. click . 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click . Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . 18 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. notice the Editable Only option. 20 Under Constraints. Verify that it is cleared. click Modify. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. and click OK. If it was owned by another user. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 24 Click OK. In this case. however.

click Door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. The precise location is not important. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Wall. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 29 In the Type Selector. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 26 Delete the door. select Basic Wall: Interior . 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Modify. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Type Selector.

save to central. In this exercise. and save locally immediately afterward. leave this file open in its current state. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. you should perform regular saves. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. it is recommended. please do so before continuing. which matches the information in the Status Bar. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Borrowed Elements is selected. When working in your local file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. checked out worksets. displays the workset as well as the element type. Whenever you save. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. In this particular case. a tooltip. You modified the building model. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. and reload the latest changes. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. At the end of a work session. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. Throughout the process. By default. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. you created your local file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. each user must check out worksets. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. two users access the central file through a network connection. add two door openings into the rooms you created. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. make elements editable. For training purposes. click Save to Central. you should relinquish all worksets. In addition. If you have not yet completed these exercises. 37 In the Save to Central dialog.

specifically sequenced. 12 In the Save As dialog. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and select Yes for Editable. 15 On the File menu. For training purposes. and click OK. select the central file. enter User 2. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. This file is for your use only. select all the User-Created worksets. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. You now have a local copy of the project. and click OK. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 9 Click Open. instructions are staggered. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. consider that person to be User 1. In addition. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. click Options. In the following section of this exercise. This is a system setting. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. return to the Settings dialog. User 2: Create a local file. one user has already created a local file. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and click Save. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. under Username. 4 Click the General Tab and. 11 On the File menu. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and reset the Username to your computer login name. skip the following section. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and select Specify. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. click Open. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Save As. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this.rvt. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click OK. 3 On the Settings menu. click Worksets. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Options. 7 In the Open dialog. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2.

and select Yes for Editable. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Floor Plans. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. modify the building model. If it is not open. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. and double-click Level 1. 24 In the Project Browser. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 19 On the File menu. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 23 Click OK. click Worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. expand Floor Plans. 17 Click OK. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning.” 29 Click OK. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. select the lower exterior wall.You are now the owner of that workset. click Save to Central. User 1: Check out worksets. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Views (all). If you only have one workset checked out. expand Views (all). it becomes the active workset. open it now. 27 On the File menu. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset.

double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 39 Click OK. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 43 In the Project Browser. 42 Select Furniture Layout. click Reload Latest. and click OK. However. click Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. right-click Level 1. and click OK. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you should create a furniture plan view. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Views (all). Before adding any furniture. click Worksets. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. under Floor Plans. 33 On the File menu. 46 In the Project Browser. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 41 On the File menu. right-click Copy of Level 1. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 45 In the Rename View dialog. Click Yes. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. select Yes for Editable.” 35 Click OK. under Floor Plans.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 37 On the File menu. click Save to Central. and click Rename. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. When you save to central. 44 In the Project Browser.

click Save to Central. the Visible by default option was not selected. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. rather than Families. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Modify. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 65 Click OK. 48 In the Type Selector. such as Wall Types. click Component. 53 On the File menu. under Show. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 50 On the View menu. and click inside any room. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. enter Exterior Wall . click Reload Latest. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. and click OK. 60 In the Rename dialog. click Save to Central. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 67 In the Save to Central dialog.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . and click OK. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rename.” 55 Click OK. choose any desk. and click Element Properties. 49 On the Design Bar. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 62 On the File menu.200mm. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Worksets. click the Worksets tab. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. NOTE System families. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Edit/New. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. Therefore. 66 On the File menu. select Project Standards. 61 Click OK 2 times. are placed under Project Standards.

Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. In subsequent steps. and still have your local files open. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you need to set up your central and local files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Reload Latest. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. and published their changes back to the central file. Checking out worksets. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. click Training Files.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. leave this file open in its current state. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. select the following. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. finished the previous workset exercises. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and save 69 On the File menu. 3 In the Save As dialog. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. throughout this training. modified the building model. click Options. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. leave this file open in its current state. This exercise requires two users and. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Each user checked out worksets. There are specific instructions for each user. and these problems are rectified. and click OK. In the final exercise of this tutorial. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). select Save to Central. As each of you work. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). 70 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. At the appropriate point in this exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. you save the training file as a central file. click Save As. User 1: Reload latest. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages.rvt. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Each user must have network access to the central file.

and click OK. 17 On the File menu. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. click Save As. and select Specify. 5 Click Save. select Make this a Central File after save. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Next. On the Settings menu. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 12 On the File menu. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. click Save As. click Options. and click OK. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. This is a system setting.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 6 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . Set the Username to User 2. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click Save. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. This is the local file for User 1. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 13 In the Open dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. In addition. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. click Options. The central file should still be open. click Open. 15 Click Open. and click OK. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. return to the Settings dialog. and click Save. select the central file. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK.

User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. select Exterior Shell. if any User-Created worksets are not open. After you submit the request. click Worksets. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. At this point. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 26 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. and then click OK. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. select them. click Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. You are now the owner of that workset. select the second window from the top. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. select Interior Layout. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 On the left exterior wall. 27 Under Active Workset. and select Yes for Editable. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 24 Under Active Workset. You are now the owner of that workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 22 In the Worksets dialog. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Afterwards. click the File menu.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. verify that Editable Only is cleared. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and then click OK. select the Interior Layout workset. and click Editing Requests. and click Open.

In this multi-user exercise. and notice the window is in the new location. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. to Local. In this case. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . select the request submitted by User 2. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 35 Click Grant. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and close 39 On the File menu. select Save to Central. 36 Click Close. select the following. you requested permission to edit the element. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. click Check Now. and the other user granted it. click Close. 38 Click OK. and click OK.

738 .

you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Using design options. you can have multiple sets of design options. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. In this particular case. The client has asked you to create various options. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). At any time in the design process. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In this tutorial. For example. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In addition. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. 739 .Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file.

click Training Files. you set up multiple design option sets. click Edit Selected. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. and click Close. With the second option. each with multiple design options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. In the second exercise. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. therefore. TIP In this exercise. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). 2 In the Design Options dialog. make your final design decision. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.In the first exercise in this lesson. click New. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. you design each of the structural options. After you create a design option. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). under Option Set. the roof and structure systems must work together. the only available command is to create a new option set. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you can edit it. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the final exercise of this lesson. and delete the unwanted options from the project. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click 12 On the Options Bar. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . expand Views (all). add three columns. expand Floor Plans.4 In the Project Browser. select: ■ ■ ■ . Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 7 In the Type Selector. TIP To center the middle column. 9 On the Design Bar. By selecting Multiple. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Column. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. and the third column centered between the two. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. In this case. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 11 On the Edit toolbar. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 5 On the View menu. or add a dimension string between the columns. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. click Modify. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the following illustration. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.

17 Zoom out and. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. click . Because of the size of the columns. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. using the same technique. they are difficult to see in this view. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 18 On the View toolbar.

In it. Next. you add the beams that span the columns. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. The first click specifies the beam start point. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Zoom in on the upper right column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 19 In the Project Browser. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 .Notice the 12 columns that you added. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click TOP OF CORE. Use the following illustration as a guide. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. click Beam. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. select Round Bar : 50mm. 21 In the Type Selector.

and select the center of the column to add a copy. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. move down to the next set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. and click the center point. zoom into the left column. click . 28 Zoom out. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. select: ■ ■ ■ . 30 On the View toolbar.25 On the Edit toolbar.

enter Brackets for New. under Option. click Rename. click Rename. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 45 Under Roofing. click New. 43 In the Rename dialog. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. enter Roofing for New. select Option 1 (primary). enter Structure for New. enter Beam for New. 46 Under Option. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 33 Click Finish Editing. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . and click OK. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. 41 Under Option Set. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). under Option Set. 37 Select Option 2 and. click Rename. not a new option set. under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog. under Option. name the option Louvers. click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click New. There should now be two roofing design options. 36 In the Rename dialog. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option Set. click New.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. 40 In the Rename dialog.

double-click ROOF TERRACE. Under Now Editing.47 Under Roofing. 52 Click Close. under Structure. name the option Sunscreen. 53 In the Project Browser. it will resemble the following illustration. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 48 Under Option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Option 2. This allows you to more easily manage the project. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. you create the second design option. When finished. select Edit Selected. select Beam. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 51 Under Edit. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. click Rename.

59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . select M_Roof Beam. 58 On the Tools menu. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. Refer to the following illustration. Using the Align tool requires two clicks.

The first click sets the move start point. click Modify. on the Edit toolbar.60 After aligning the beam. 62 Select the beam and. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . The second click represents the move end point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 61 On the Design Bar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.

click . the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click Save As. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 68 In the Design Options dialog. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. you need this file in its current state. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . Notice that even before you close the dialog. and click Save. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 66 On the View toolbar. 67 On the Tools menu. click Finish Editing. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 70 On the File menu. which is visible by default. name the file. 69 Click Close. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. m_Urban_House-in progress. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.rvt.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

delete them after the rafter is in place. select Louvers (primary). select Rafter 50mm x 250mm.rvt. 2 On the Tools menu. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. a Louver system. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. 5 Click Close. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. and double-click TOP OF CORE. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 4 Under Edit. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. you set up multiple design option sets. open it now. 6 In the Project Browser. Under Now Editing. click Component. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. With the second option. do so now. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. you design each of the roofing options. The first option. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Roofing. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Edit Selected. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the other for beams. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. In the next exercise. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers.In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Sunscreen. 8 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). each with multiple design options to pick from. The second roofing system. 10 Referring to the following illustration. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. If you need to add dimensions.

Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click Modify. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. under Other. Enter 5 for Number. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. enter 11750 mm for Length. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click . click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. Select Constrain. click Array. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Edit menu. 12 Select the rafter you added previously.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER.

Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click Component. 26 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select Constrain. click Modify. and click OK. 20 In the Type Selector. 25 With the louver still selected. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 22 On the Design Bar. 27 For the array starting point. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and select the louver you just placed. Enter 34 for Number. Select 2nd for Move To. click the Edit menu. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Options Bar. click . and click Array. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 5475 mm for Length. under Other.

754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press Enter. and. enter 300. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 29 On the View toolbar.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. click . when the listening dimension displays.

and click OK.The louver roof system is complete. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 34 In the Project Browser. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and then click Close. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Edit Selected. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. click . click Lines. 39 On the Design Bar. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 40 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing. 30 On the Tools menu. Therefore. expand Elevations. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. under Roofing. In this case. 33 Under Editing. 31 In the Design Options dialog. under Edit. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. select Sunscreen. and double-click West. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 .

The arcs should connect. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. The first two points define the ends of the line.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . Under Constraints. 45 Click OK. Under Constraints. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 43 On the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. then the center arc. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 46 On the Tools menu. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. click Properties. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 41 Select the top of the left column. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 48 On the Design Bar. click Trim/Extend. and the third point defines the arc. You will fix this in a later step. the top of the next column on the right. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. then you can modify it through the dimension. click Finish Sketch. 49 On the View toolbar. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Select the right arc.

under Edit. 4 In the Project Browser. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 52 On the File menu. do so now. Managing Design Options In this exercise. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. The first option. and click Rename. 50 On the Tools menu. under Views (all). Managing Design Options | 757 . You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. expand 3D Views. and click Duplicate. tertiary. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. click Save. under Views (all). right-click {3D}. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Sunscreen.The louver roof system is complete. make it part of the building model. you designed each of the roofing options. and then click Close. secondary. a Louver system. click Finish Editing. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. you need this file in its current state. you select a design. and last options. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. 51 In the Design Options dialog. After exploring the combinations. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. and click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. enter Primary Option. The second roofing system. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. In this exercise. and delete the discarded design options. You have completed the sunscreen roof system.

8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Secondary Option. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. 9 Click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu. double-click Primary Option. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. 11 On the View menu. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK.5 Right-click each of the copies. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. and click Rename.

and click OK. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. under 3D Views. under Views (all). In your design options. At this point.14 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. Managing Design Options | 759 . 15 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option. and click OK. 19 On the View menu. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. double-click Tertiary Option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. click the Design Options tab. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 18 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. In this case.

the beam option becomes part of the model. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set.22 On the Tools menu. under Structure. After exploring the combinations. double-click Primary Option. An alert is displayed. click Delete. you selected a design. 27 In the alert dialog. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Accept Primary. select Make Primary. 26 Under Option Set. the current primaries are no longer options. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. and deleted the discarded design options. This was the client choice for structural. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Yes. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. select Beam. made it part of the building model. In this exercise. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. 35 On the File menu. The set is deleted. click Save. click Yes. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 30 Under Option Set. 24 Under Option. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 25 Select Structure. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. Because the client has selected the design option. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Close. 29 Select Roofing.

You create new phases. demolish existing construction. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. 761 . This changes room definition and total building model area. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. In the second exercise. In the second exercise. complete with schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. then add new walls and doors in a different location. demolish existing walls and doors. You create new phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. and then add new building model elements. For the client. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases.

In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Click Cancel. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. During the demolition and renovation process. you do not need to change the project units to metric. under Phasing. click Modify. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. If you wish to do so. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. click (Element Properties). under Phasing. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. click Training Files.rvt. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. As you add new elements to the building model. are visible in this view. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all).Phasing Your Model In this exercise. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 7 Click Cancel. When you create a new project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. click Project Units. This means that all building model elements. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 6 On the Options Bar. and open Common\c_Phasing. go to the Settings menu. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. define the units. regardless of phase. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. expand Floor Plans.

12 On the Options Bar. After you create the views. under Floor Plans. and click OK. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. click (Filter Selection). including the door tags. under Phasing. 20 In the Rename dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. click Modify. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. are highlighted in red. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename dialog. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 10 On the Options Bar. Because this is a phase-specific view. select Existing. Because this is a renovation project. enter Level 1 . and click OK. and click OK. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. all of the building model elements. enter Level 1 . under Floor Plans. click .Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. and click OK. right-click Level 1. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 11 In the Filter dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. right-click Copy of Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 763 . 19 In the Project Browser. After you release the mouse button. right-click Level 1 . Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. clear Door Tags. 17 Click No.Demo. for Phase Created. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction.Existing.Existing.Existing.

This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. to which all the building model elements belong. new construction occurs after existing construction. Demolished. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. Phase status is time-dependent.Existing. under New. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. 29 For Composite Plan. There are five default phase filters.Demo. enter Composite Plan. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. Because of this time relationship. under Floor Plans. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Next. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. and click OK. You may need to zoom in to see this. 26 In the Phasing dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you modify these settings. under Phasing. In this case. under Floor Plans. Existing. double-click Level 1 . select Existing. and Temporary. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 28 Under Filter Name. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 24 In the Project Browser. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. On a logical time line. select Overridden. click the Phase Filters tab. however.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 21 In the Project Browser. 27 Click New. for Phase. double-click Level 1 . Later in this exercise. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black.

double-click Level 1 . select Demolished. 34 In the Color dialog. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. As you click each wall. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished.Existing. click OK. 32 In the Demolished row. under Floor Plans. you demolish all elements hosted by it. double-click Level 1 . When you demolish the host. click (Demolish). 35 Click OK twice. 36 Using the same method. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. select the line style. 42 In the Project Browser. select red.Demo. or you can use the demolish tool. select the interior walls one at a time. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser.31 Under Phase Status. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. There are two ways to demolish an element. click the value for Color. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. under Floor Plans. Next. you begin demolition. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. its display changes to a red dashed line. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. select a lighter blue. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. under Cut ➤ Lines. Phasing Your Model | 765 . 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration.

44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Phasing.Demo. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Wall. under Phasing. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK. select Show Previous + New. 47 In the Type Selector. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Basic Wall: Interior . 50 In the Type Selector. add a long horizontal wall. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. for Phase Filter.Existing. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 53 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter. 52 Open Level 1 . The demolished walls no longer display. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door.

The renovated building model plan is displayed. click (Default 3D View). Phasing Your Model | 767 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. and existing shows as half-tone.New. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. regardless of phase. which are displayed as red. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 62 If necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 60 On the View toolbar. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. All elements are displayed in this view. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.Demo.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 61 On the View Control Bar. new is shown in blue. right-click Level 1 . You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 59 Open Level 1 . This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .New. 57 In the Project Browser.

You can also see that the room quantities.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. In this view. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. the rooms change in both definition and size. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Demo. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. In the next exercise. Notice that this view is the original building model. If you wish to do so. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. you do not need to change the project units to metric. go to the Settings menu. and new construction. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. therefore. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. If you wish to save this file. and click OK. All room boundaries are phase-specific. demolition.New. and double-click Level 1 . The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation.rvt. expand Views (all). Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.Existing. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you can do so at this time. click Training Files. As the renovation process continues. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Open Level 1 . expand Floor Plans. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. define the units. In this exercise. sizes. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. 3 Open Level 1 . 63 Close the file. you can see the new walls added to the building model. click Project Units. In this view.

click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 10 Open Level 1 . 6 Open Level 1 . click Room Tag. yet they have different room numbers. 11 On the Design Bar. click Room. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction.Demo.Existing. click Modify. 13 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.New. 5 Click OK. click Room. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. In the Phasing dialog. Use the following illustration as a guide. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . and maximize the view.

you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original.Existing. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 19 On the Window menu. 17 On the Window menu. 20 Close the file.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. 16 In the Project Browser. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.New Construction. 18 Open Room Schedule . Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. In addition. In this exercise. View phase-specific room schedules. and double-click Room Schedule . room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. The two schedule views tile. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . expand Schedules/Quantities. click Tile. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. In this case. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. click Close Hidden Windows.

and manage the links throughout the project. modify their visibility.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. In these situations. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. 771 . This maximizes efficiency. You position the building models on the site plan. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. performance. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In this tutorial. In the final lesson. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects.

Linking Building Models In this lesson. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. modify their visibility.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. and the other is a townhouse. You link two building models to the project. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You position the building models on the site. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.

5 On the File menu. this option will place the link at a predefined location. click Open. This option is grayed out. Manual .By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. and click Properties. click Close. 2 On the File menu. this system is not exposed to the user. 8 Clear Read-only.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. and open Common\c_Site. c_Townhouse. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. c_Condo_Complex. select the three files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. however. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. ■ ■ Manual .■ Auto . Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. click Open.rvt. RELATED See the lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. click Save As. in the Model Linking folder that you created. right-click. All three files now reside. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Auto . Otherwise. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Click Open. 4 On the File menu. you can do so. click Training Files. with write permission. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. Select c_Site. and save the file there.

11 On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. For Positioning. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 13 Click Open. you can go to the Settings menu. Notice the blue detail lines. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). you do not need to change the project units to metric.Origin to Origin. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. expand Floor Plans. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. If you wish to do so. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and make your changes. click Project Units. select Auto . These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.

Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model.rvt displays in the Type Selector. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 .The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. click (Move). 16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The Move command requires two clicks. The linked model moves as one object. 17 For the move endpoint. After you select it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The first click specifies the move start point. 15 On the Edit toolbar.

the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 18 On the View menu.After you specify the location to move to. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. select Auto .Origin to Origin. and select c_Townhouse. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 21 Click Open. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. For Positioning.

you first specify the rotation start point. In this case. click to specify the rotation start point. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click (Rotate). 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. 23 On the Edit toolbar. when the vertical line displays. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 .

778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. click (Move). This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.

30 For the starting point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The Copy command works much like the Move command. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. click (Copy).

if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and click OK. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 37 On the View toolbar.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. under Identity data. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. for Name. click . 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . use the Move command to make any adjustments. click Rotate. 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B.

you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . When you originally linked the files. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. After linking the files. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar.38 On the File menu. 2 On the SteeringWheels. click (SteeringWheels). click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. In this exercise. click Save. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click and hold Orbit. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. do so before continuing. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. you need this project file open and in this view. they were placed too low within the site topography. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In the next exercise. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. when it highlights. In the steps that follow. expand Elevations. To do this. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. and click to select it. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. Click the Revit Links tab. under Views (all). click (Align).rvt. and then select the plane that you want to align. and click OK. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. you first select the plane you want to align to. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. When using the Align command. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. and click to select the line. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 3 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. In this case. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. and double-click South. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project.

9 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 14 On the SteeringWheels. under Elevations. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click Save. 15 On the File menu. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 11 Return to the South elevation view. click and hold Orbit. double-click North. (SteeringWheels). click 13 On the View toolbar.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 12 On the View toolbar. This would over-constrain the model.

you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Revit Links tab. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 2 On the View menu. expand c_Townhouse. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. In the next exercise. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In this exercise. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . scroll down and clear Levels. or Custom. As you can see. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. and the halftone settings for each linked project. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. double-click South. 9 Under Visibility. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. click By Host View. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. select <Custom>. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. click Custom.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. By linked view. you can independently control the visibility settings. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. display settings. 10 Click OK. 4 Under Visibility. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. 8 For Annotation Categories. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. under Elevations. If the Basics page is set to Custom. When you link a file. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. do so before continuing.rvt. detail level. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files.

click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. and click OK. click By Host View. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 .rvt.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. double-click Level 1. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. Using the Custom option. medium. under Floor Plans.rvt. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. or fine. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. click the Revit Links tab. You can click the value for Detail Level. on the Basics tab. 20 For c_Townhouse. 24 Click OK. and then set the detail level to coarse. In this case. By selecting custom under Model Categories. select <Custom>. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. click the Revit Links tab. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. With linked files. 23 In the Model categories list. click Visibility/Graphics. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 16 Under Visibility. By default. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. 14 On the View menu. expand c_Townhouse. under Display Settings. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.rvt. select Custom. no detail level changes are required. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.

In this exercise. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. 29 Click OK. and phase filter of a specific link. In this case. click OK. However. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. 31 On the File menu. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 28 Select By linked view for View range. select c_Townhouse. existing. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In most cases. In the next exercise. on a sloped site for instance. All other components are grayed out. In this case. you need this project file open and in this view. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. phase. 26 Under Display Settings. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. 25 On the Revit Links tab. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. demolished. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. With the Show All filter applied. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. there are situations. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. you manage the linked files. By default. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. under Visibility. click Custom for the Townhouse link.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. click Save. all new.rvt. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . this is preferable.

As links are moved to new locations in the host project. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. 6 At the confirmation prompt. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 5 Click Unload. In general. and Saved Path fields are read only. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. click the Revit tab. Locations Not Saved. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. the link is maintained. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. Notice the Loaded. click Manage Links. You learn more about this in the next lesson. click Yes. They supply information regarding the links. The default path type is Relative. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location.rvt.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. select c_Condo_Complex. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. In a shared coordinate environment. 3 Under Path Type. do so before continuing. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 7 Click OK. 4 Under Linked File.

If you choose not to open that workset. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. click Save As. and select Specify. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. click the arrow next to the Open button. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. the link is not loaded. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. expand Revit Links. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .rvt. To do this. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. right-click c_Condo_Complex. 9 On the File menu. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. However. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Reload. In general. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. When you initially place the link. In these cases. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance.

navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. you are establishing a shared origin point. In essence. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. and save it as an RVT file. name the file Site_Project. If you have not completed the previous lesson. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. leave the project file open in its current view. In this exercise. and the resulting project files. If you intend to complete the next lesson now.10 In the Save As dialog. The host file consists primarily of site components. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. do so before continuing. In the next lesson. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). When you share coordinates between projects. When used in conjunction with model linking.

coordinates are used. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt and click Open. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. and the resulting project files. When you are working in the host project. click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. open it before continuing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. As indicated in the Status Bar. Linking Building Models on page 772. Select Site_Project. click the Condo Complex. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. If you have not completed the lesson. do so before continuing. 2 On the Tools menu. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. In this case. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. 3 In the drawing area. If you have closed the project.

If you have not completed the exercise. However. and Lot C. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. and click OK. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. On the Status Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. it is placed at a specific location. In this exercise. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. 5 On the Design Bar. select Location 1. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . do so before continuing. These three locations can be named Lot A. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. click to select it. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. even though both models originate from one linked file. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. but can have multiple additional locations. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Lot B. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. you need this project file open and in this view. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. when the edges highlight.

9 In the Select Location dialog. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. click OK. under Instance Parameters. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 12 On the Options Bar. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. This is a one-time operation. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. under Instance Parameters. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click Not Shared for Shared Location. When constraining a link to a location. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Under Value. enter Lot A for New. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. 7 In the Rename dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Change. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Record the current position as a location. select Move instance to. click Rename. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Reconcile. and click OK. . changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file.2 On the Options Bar. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. In the Choose Location dialog. click . It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use.

make sure Lot B is selected. Record current position as. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select Save. When you release the mouse button. 26 Click OK. select the second option. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. enter Lot B for Name. click Manage Links. you cannot redefine its location. 19 In the Select Location dialog. click OK. 30 On the Tools menu. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 16 Click Change. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. Notice the OK button is still not active. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. By relocating a project. click the Revit tab. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.Notice the OK button is not active. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. and then select the townhouse project. a warning displays. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and the left townhouse resides at that location. and click OK. or cancel the action. When you create a location. ignore the warning. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. click Duplicate. and click OK. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. The second click specifies the move endpoint. To explicitly save a location. the active location position is moved. click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 23 Click Save Locations. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. When you relocate a project. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. This is a two-click process. Because Lot A is currently in use. The first click specifies the move start point.

and click OK. 36 On the File menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. NOTE In the following exercise. click Save.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 33 On the Edit menu. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. click Close. In this exercise. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. you work in one of the linked projects. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. select Save. 34 On the File menu. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

double-click 1st Floor. Select c_Condo_Complex. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In this exercise. In addition. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. click Open. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. When opening the linked file. if other models were linked into the same host. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host.rvt file. select Auto . The current active location is Lot A. Also. Because this building model only has one named location. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.By Shared Coordinates.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. For Positioning. 2 On the File menu. If you have not completed the exercises. under Floor Plans. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. it is placed automatically within the host project. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. do so before continuing. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Click Open.rvt file. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . If you have not completed the exercises. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Make Current. do so before continuing.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. In the next exercise. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click Manage Place and Locations. 7 Click OK. click View Properties. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you manage the shared locations. you need this project file open and in this view. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. and click OK. under Graphics. click OK. click Duplicate. you can select Lot C if necessary. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 6 Select Lot B. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. enter Lot C. orient a view to true north. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. and click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. In this exercise. In the host file. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. select True North for Orientation. you create a new location. 3 In the Name dialog. Notice that Lot A is the current active location.

click Open.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Select Site_Project. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. click Close. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 10 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . On the Options Bar. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.rvt and click Open. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. You can save the file if you wish. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. If you have not completed the exercise. In this exercise. do so before continuing. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise.

select Doors. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Category. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. select Count. and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 5 Under Available fields.

You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. click Close. 14 On the File menu. under Other. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. 12 Select Grand totals. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In this exercise. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. and click Properties. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser.8 Click OK. click Save. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . 13 On the File menu. select Family and Type for Sort by. clear Itemize every instance. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. right-click Door Schedule. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. expand Schedules/Quantities. You have completed this tutorial.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

click the Graphics tab. Notice that the drawing area is black.rte. click Training Files. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. selection default options. In the second lesson. journal cleanup options. you modify the system environment. 4 Under Colors. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 6 In the New Project dialog. 11 Under Colors. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 8 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and set it as your default template. click Browse. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 10 In the Options dialog. 803 . click OK. 3 In the Options dialog. These settings control the graphics. which is independent of the project settings. click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color. and click OK. In the first lesson. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. they are not saved to project files or template files. Finally. click the value for Selection color. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. notification preferences. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. you create an office template. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. under Template file. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. and your username when using worksets.

click Modify. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. However. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. select One hour. For Tooltip assistance. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear Invert background color. click Wall.12 In the Color dialog. select yellow. 26 In the Options dialog. When an error occurs. click Modify. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 13 Click the General tab. 22 When prompted to save changes. click the Graphics tab. 19 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Settings. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. select None. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the system settings apply to this project. select red. click No. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.rvt. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. and select the wall. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 15 Click OK. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. click Training Files. 14 Under Notifications. and click OK. For Selection color. the elements causing the error display using this color.

It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. click Places. 8 Click Cancel. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Your login name displays by default. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. including your default project template. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . 2 In the Options dialog. you can start a new project with that template. select Normal. Specifying File Locations on page 805. you specify default file locations. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. do not save the changes. family template files. 3 Under Default template file. under Default path for family template files.27 Click the General tab. TIP To view a template. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). If prompted. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. click Browse. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 7 In the Options dialog. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. 4 Click Cancel. notice the list of library names. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Browse to select a template. select the folder to save your files to by default. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. click Browse. such as in a large. This path is set automatically during the installation process. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. centralized. select your preferred Save reminder interval. Under Journal File Cleanup. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Open. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 5 Under Default path for user files. click the File Locations tab. click Browse. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 10 In the Places dialog. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. For Tooltip assistance. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. However. Under Username. These files are used in the software support process. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and family libraries. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files.

or loading a Revit Architecture file. and select it as the library path. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click (Add Value). 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. When you are opening. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . saving. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 11 In the Places dialog. In the following illustration. and click Open. under Libraries. and change the name to My Library. Save. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. or families. Load.library names and path. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and click the icon side of the field. templates. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. and you can create new libraries.

click My Library. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as bump maps. click the Spelling tab. If you want to relocate this path. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Save.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and Import dialogs. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 22 Click Places. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. click Edit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 28 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 9 In the text editor. 3 Under Settings. click the My Library icon. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. enter sheetmtl-Cu. and click OK twice. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. If you work in a large office. 15 Under Library Name. 23 Select My Library. This path is determined during installation. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . custom color files. and decal image files. 5 In the text editor. Load. specify the new location here. view the current path. 19 Click Cancel. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. scroll down the list of building industry terms. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 21 Click the File Locations tab. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path.

you modify snap settings. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Options dialog. If prompted.rte. click OK. click Restore Defaults. click OK. In this exercise. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. You can turn snap settings on and off. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling.11 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. As you zoom in and out within a view. click the Spelling tab. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click Modify. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Training Files. 22 In the text editor. 18 In the Options dialog. you modify snap increments. work with snapping turned off. click Edit. 2 In the New Project dialog. do not save the changes. 19 Under Settings. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Browse. click default template. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 21 In the text editor. click Text. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. under Template file. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 4 In the New Project dialog.

For example. 7 Under Object Snaps. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. While sketching. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. such as ZO to zoom out. TIP To zoom while sketching.. and move the cursor to the right. use the wheel button on your mouse. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. and enter 500 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. enter SM. snapping reverts to the system default settings. click Wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. click OK. 8 In the Snaps dialog. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . 10 On the Options Bar. zoom out until it does so. clear Chain. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint.6 Under Dimension Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. If it does not. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and specify the wall endpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. it will snap to the endpoints. and do not save the file. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Wall. the midpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 24 Click OK. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. This is the increment that you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and the wall edges.. and delete the value 500 . Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that snapping is once again active. 18 Enter SM. Do not set the wall end point. 21 Move the cursor downward. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.

When you apply a material to an element.rvt. click Training Files. You create and modify materials. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. and open Metric\m_Settings. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and object styles.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. In the steps that follow. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. lines. fill patterns. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you render a region to observe the changes. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. annotations. Finally. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. save the project file with a unique name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Using these options. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise.

In the next exercise.Fieldstone. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. In the steps that follow. and texture of the material. These details will display in rendered images. The properties describe the color. When you change properties of a render appearance.Fieldstone. and double-click 02 Entry Level. 6 Click Replace. and click OK. read-only library for render appearances.Fieldstone material. and select Masonry . scale. 3 Click (Duplicate). and click (Element Properties). 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. Masonry . The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK. In the Materials dialog. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. When a model element is loaded into a project. select Stone. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. 2 Scroll down the materials list. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . for Class. this material provides a starting point for the new material. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. 9 Click Apply. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry .Stone. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. and click OK. However. 10 Click the Graphics tab. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. enter Masonry . The Render Appearance Library is a local.

18 For Finish 1. select the rear exterior wall. 19 On the right side of the Material field. and click OK. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Brick. 15 Click Duplicate. click Model Graphics Style. and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog.Fieldstone. 16 Enter the new wall name. 23 While pressing CTRL. click in the Material field. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 22 Select the left exterior wall. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 26 On the View Control Bar. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click (Default 3D View). 24 In the Type Selector. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . click Edit.14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Masonry . 17 For Structure. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. Fieldstone on CMU. 21 Click OK three times. . 25 On the View toolbar. click Edit/New.Fieldstone. click This is the material that you created. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.

right-click the Design Bar. 31 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 29 In the 3D view. The rendering process begins. under Quality. When finished. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. select Low or Medium. for Setting. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. In the following exercise. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. and click Rendering. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. click Rendering Dialog. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. select the render region (a red rectangle). select Region. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. click Show the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 3 Under Pattern Type. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. such as steel. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Then click Render again. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Zoom into the model. 5 Click New. and clear Region. expand Elevations. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 7 Under Custom. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall.rvt. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.rvt. and double-click West. m_Settings-in progress. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. choose Model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Show the model. in the Rendering dialog. Drafting pattern density is fixed. select Custom.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. click Import. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting.

56.Fieldstone. under Pattern Type. In the Materials dialog. for Finish 1. 13 On the Options Bar. 22 Click OK three times.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 10 For Name. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. click Modify. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New. enter . 11 Click OK. and for Import scale. click Training Files. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Model. and click OK. click . select fldstn. and click OK. 21 In the Materials dialog. click to select a fill pattern. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit. click OK. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 17 On the right side of the Materials field.pat.Fieldstone material. 9 Under Custom. (Element Properties). notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . click 15 For Structure. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 23 On the Design Bar. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. enter Fieldstone. click in the Material field. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model.

you can set the window frame material to By Category. there are often multiple window types within a project. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. adjust your zoom settings as needed. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click 3 Windows. expand 3D Views. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. click (Default 3D View). Controlling Object Styles on page 817. m_Settings-in progress. TIP If the pattern does not display. 2 On the keyboard. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. For example. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.25 On the View toolbar. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

13 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Materials dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click By Category. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 14 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 10 Select the arched window. click (Element Properties). 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column.3 On the View Control Bar. click in the Value column. for Trim Exterior Material. 11 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . and click 15 Click OK twice. under Materials and Finishes. click (Element Properties). for Trim Exterior Material. click By Category (located under the materials list). . under Materials and Finishes. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.

It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. type red.red paint. 19 For Trim. or keywords include the word red. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. expand Windows. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. click OK. and select Trim. and click OK.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Paint. 29 In the Materials dialog. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. for Name. enter Trim . click OK. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. select Trim. . click in the Material column. for Class. 23 Click Replace. 18 On the Model Objects tab. descriptions. (Duplicate). 25 In the search field. and click OK. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. When you render a 3D view. 28 Under Shading. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. Controlling Object Styles | 819 .

820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 7 On the View Control Bar. Now that you have created a line pattern.rvt. is open with the 3D view active. under Category. (Default 3D view). 11 For Line Pattern. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Roofs. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. for Name. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. m_Settings-in progress. select Roof Line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 For Line Color. select Red. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820.31 On the View toolbar. enter Roof Line. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog.rvt. click New.

13 In the Project Browser. double-click to Building. 14 On the View Control Bar. but not the line pattern. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. Notice that the line color displays in this view.12 Click OK. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. click Model Graphics Style. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . under 3D Views.

18 For Line Color. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. under Floor Plans. select 5. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. elevations. sections. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Plans. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. double-click 03 Roof. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Black. For Pattern.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Solid. for Visibility. 20 Click OK. 19 For Line Pattern. under Category. select Roof Line. select Roofs. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. select Roofs. select Blue. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. 22 On the Model Categories tab. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Color. 15 In the Project Browser. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override.

click New. select 2. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. and click OK. (Line). select Double dash. select Red. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. Notice the site topography and the property lines. For Line Color. Click Click (Draw). 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. This places the line above the topography. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . select Zoning Setback. For Line Pattern.25 Click OK twice. select Level: 02 Entry Level. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. enter Zoning Setback. click Lines. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 31 Click OK. 29 For Name. 33 In the Type Selector. under Modify Subcategories. 28 In the Line Styles dialog.

and then clear Property Lines. Expand Site. double-click 02 Entry Level. and clear Zoning Setback. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 36 On the View toolbar. 44 On the View toolbar. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 38 On the Model Categories tab. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 43 Click OK. NOTE If Site is not selected. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and clear Property Lines. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 39 Click OK. and clear Zoning Setback. select it. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . (Default 3D View). Modifying Annotations on page 825. under Floor Plans. click (Default 3D View). expand Lines. 40 In the Project Browser. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save.

9 In the Type Selector. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Imperial. click Duplicate. click Dimension. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. select Linear . click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser.rvt.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. click the default value. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. (Undo). m_Settings-in progress. for Units Format. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. and then click outside the second wall. 4 Enter the name Linear . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.rvt. under Floor Plans. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. 7 Click OK twice. and place a dimension on the floor plan. To place a dimension. click another wall. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Modifying Annotations | 825 . select Feet and fractional inches. double-click 02 Entry Level. 5 Under Text. click Modify. m_Settings-in progress. click one wall. 10 On the Standard toolbar. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. For Units. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. You have created a new dimension style. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Imperial and click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag .Number as the assigned tag. click (Element Properties). click Tag All Not Tagged. click Training Files. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 28 On the Design Bar.14 On the Options Bar.Number. 22 Under Loaded Tags. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. Leave M_Window Tag . click M_Window Tag . 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the preview image. 26 On the Options Bar. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 16 Click Cancel. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 24 While pressing CTRL. 27 On the west wall. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. clear Leader. notice that the label displays 1i. click Tag ➤ By Category.rfa. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . scroll down to Windows. 21 In the Tags dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 18 In the Tags dialog.Number is now the assigned tag. 23 Click OK. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. select the 3 window tags. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click the bottom window. Then press Delete.Number. under Category. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 19 Click Load. In the steps that follow.

M_Window Tag . for Length. (Default 3D View). Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Specifying Units of Measurement. for Rounding. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 8 Under Walls. and click OK. select Openings. m_Settings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you specify the project units of measurements. select Faces. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. for Area. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. select 0 decimal places. dimensions use these project settings. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.Temporary Dimensions. Unless overridden. 32 On the View toolbar.Number. the other displays the instance value. you modify the detail level assignments.rvt. 9 Under Doors and Windows. verify that Create is clear. In the final section. click the default value. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click the default value. 31 On the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Under Category. In the second section. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. and click OK. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. For Unit symbol. click Modify. and Detail Level Options | 827 . Click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. and Detail Level Options on page 827. 30 Under Leader. notice Window Tags appears twice. dimension values display using this setting. 4 In the Project Units dialog. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. select To the nearest 100. you modify the temporary dimension settings.Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. In the first section. 6 Click OK. Unless overridden. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 3 In the Format dialog. Temporary Dimensions. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. select meters squared. and click OK.

click Training Files. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. expand Views (all). Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. expand Floor Plans. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. You do not select a view scale to move it. 12 Click OK. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In this table. click . Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When you create a new view and specify its view scale. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and expand 3D Views. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column.In this project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings.

Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. and click Apply. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). expand each view type. and click OK. 8 Select Phase. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. select Discipline.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 2 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . select Type/Discipline. and click OK. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 5 On the Views tab.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand both the Architectural and Structural views.

830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click New. expand each sheet set. 16 Click the Views tab. under Sheets.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. and click OK. click the Folders tab. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 12 Click the Sheets tab.

By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. levels. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. when you create a new project. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. You can also save these settings in a template file. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. When you create new projects. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. expand 3D Views. Whenever you create a new project or template. and open Metric\Templates. Creating an Office Template | 831 . When you create a new template based on an existing template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. You can choose from several templates. In that case. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and view names.rte template. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. Creating an Office Template on page 831. and click OK. and click Open. under Views. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. In the lesson that follows. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. If you want to save this file.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. View Type (Family and Type). 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. dimensions styles. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you select the starting point for your office template. click Browse. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. For example. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. Proceed to the next lesson. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. navigate to your preferred directory. enter a unique file name. the same rules apply. 2 Under Template file. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. click Training Files. and click OK. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Complete. and expand both Architectural and Structural. In this lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you create an office template. and Discipline.

12 Under Template File. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. for Create new. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 15 Under Create new. 6 Click OK. 14 Click Open. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. weights. click Browse. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. close them. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other than the default. in the drawing area. and double-click North. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 7 In the Project Browser. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. you modify the project settings for your new template. In this exercise. For example. 13 Select the default template. you can select it now. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. If you have additional projects open. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. select Project template. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Project. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and.5 In the New Project dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. When you create the material. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. drag a zoom region around the level heads.

9 Click OK when finished.During this exercise. or modify existing patterns. and move model patterns. and similar attributes. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. annotation objects. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. or refer to the online help. You do this by defining the render appearance. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 4 Click Replace. texture. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. and materials for model objects. including color. 13 If necessary. create and modify them as needed. or refer to the online help. In the Object Styles dialog. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. specific modifications are not dictated. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. When you create or modify a material. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. Modifying System Settings on page 803. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. and scroll through the list of categories. You can align. 2 Scroll down the materials list. rotate. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. transparency. For more details on modifying these settings. line colors. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. you can set line weights. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. For more information. and change render appearance properties. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. the changes are saved as part of the project template. see a preview of the rendered material. If you change render appearance properties. Observe the materials that are already defined. see the previous lesson. create new subcategories. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . line patterns. and imported objects. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. TIP For more information about creating new materials. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry.

select it. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. select it from this list. To see the details of a particular style. click Duplicate. and click Edit. and create new subcategories as needed. and specify the properties. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 29 Click OK. 32 To modify a line pattern. modify the line weight. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. You can add and delete view scales. tags. create new line subcategories. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. name the style. and dimensions. or line pattern as needed. 19 If necessary. line color. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 34 Click OK. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads.15 Modify categories. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 18 For existing line categories. 20 Click OK. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. such as section lines and dimension lines. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed.

51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. In the Tags dialog. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. Linear. and click OK. click Duplicate. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. name the style. To see the details of a particular style. 50 To load new annotation tags. 62 Click OK. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. click Load. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 57 Specify the Slope option. click Format. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Volume. 58 Click OK. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . For example. angular. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 46 Click OK.40 Click OK. 61 Under Doors and Windows. and Angle settings. select it from this list. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 55 Click OK. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 60 Under Walls. and choose a decimal symbol. TIP In the drawing area. 53 For Length. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. and radial dimensions are modified separately. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. and specify the properties.

Medium. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. Each command is available on the Settings menu. or edit existing organization types. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. or edit existing organization types. 69 If necessary. click the Views tab. The detail level is based on view scale. When you create a new view. and make modifications in each area as necessary. or Fine. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. However. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. and move view scales as needed. 72 If necessary. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Although these settings can be saved within a template. In such a case. 65 Click OK. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. create new browser organization types. 70 Click the Sheets tab. See Setting up If necessary. To move the view scales. 73 Click OK. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. rename. You can find additional information in Help. Using the arrows between the columns. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. In a typical project. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. create new browser organization types. 68 Delete. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. For example. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Links to associated tutorials are provided. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. click the arrows between columns. Use the table below as a checklist. 71 Delete. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. rename. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 64 Review the table.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser.

there are some important thoughts to consider. If you have not completed the previous exercise. modify. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. you do both. Depending on the intended use of this template. you could load detail components. or use the Project Browser. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. title blocks. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. If necessary. the section cut material. and the poche depth. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. Although this is possible. click Door. For example.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. You can load any family or group into a template. If this selection is satisfactory. or electrical fixtures. 2 In the Type Selector. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. However. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you can move onto the next component type. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . you may want to delete. furniture. phase filters. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. and electrical fixtures. or add to this selection. do so before starting this exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. In addition. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. you can set up the phases. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. For example. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. In the steps that follow. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. if you load every available window type. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. notice the list of doors already loaded. Although the options are endless.

create. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. or modify a door. and click OK. click Edit/New. Enter a name.3 To modify. In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that each family category is listed. expand Families. or load a new door type. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. click Load. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Select it. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Make modifications. and click Open. and click OK. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. create. In the Element Properties dialog. click Bar. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Click Duplicate. and click OK. Modify type properties. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.

13 Click OK. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. To load a title block.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. click Load. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. Detail Level. This title block is currently part of the template. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. load. you created new projects using different templates. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. To do so. In addition. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the views required for your template.) 10 Expand the title block. click 12 Click Preview. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. In this exercise. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. and select the title block type. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. (Element Properties). In addition. Discipline. create. and click Delete. 11 On the Options Bar. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. right-click the component. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. View Range.

15 In the Project Browser. Every time a new plan view is created. 6 Click OK. double-click Site. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 18 If you modified any other view templates. click Apply. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Site Plan. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and click OK. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. After applying the template. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 11 Click Apply. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. you can apply a view template to any view. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. under Elevations. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. and apply the appropriate template. and then click OK. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Architectural Plan. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Apply. and double-click Level 1. open the view from the Project Browser. double-click South. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 2 Under Names.settings of categories and subcategories. you will first modify view templates. 12 In the Project Browser. 4 If necessary. At any time. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. In addition. under Floor Plans. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and click OK. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click Level 2. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 3 Specify each value according to your needs.

in the shortcut menu. under 3D Views. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. expand 3D Views. use the ViewCube. ceiling plans. click Schedule/Quantities. If you want to modify view properties. click 29 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Orient to a Direction. a face. Rename. duplicate. right-click the ViewCube. and click Rename. review the floor plans. 31 Rename the 3D View. duplicate. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 22 In the Project Browser. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. If it does not display. notice that you have the option to rename. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. right-click {3D}. click Level. on the View toolbar. right-click Level 1. and click Save View. right-click the ViewCube. enter a view name. right-click the ViewCube. 23 To add more levels to the template. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. and select the desired direction. right-click the view name. review the existing floor plans. By default. If prompted. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. click Orient to View. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. (Default 3D View). Blue level heads have associated plan views. under Floor Plans. To orient the 3D view to another view. 24 On the Options Bar. To orient the 3D view to a direction. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. or delete them as needed. in the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . 20 In the Project Browser. and. or delete this view. and click Properties. 30 In the Project Browser. and elevations. and select the desired view.Notice the level names. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 27 Create additional levels as needed. or an edge of the ViewCube. select Make Plan View. Black level heads have no associated views.

select the category type. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. or exportlayersdgn. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. click Add View. click Sheet. select one. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. and click Add View to Sheet. Right-click the sheet name. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. modify settings as needed. On the Formatting tab. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. To do so. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. modify settings as needed. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar.txt for MicroStation). 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 42 Create new sheets as needed. On the Filter tab. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and click OK. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.txt for AutoCAD. assign filters. 40 To add views to the sheet. select the title block and delete it. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). on the View tab of the Design Bar. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. and modify their properties accordingly. and click OK. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. You can still add views to the sheet. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. modify settings as needed.You can add schedules to a template. To later add a title block to a sheet. in the Project Browser. and click Rename. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. You are prompted to select a title block. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. On the Appearance tab. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. After the sheet is created. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. and click OK. Select a view. select the default title block. select and order required fields. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. 37 Click OK.

you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. and so on. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. for example. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . They cannot be shared with other projects. therefore. When you import a DWG or DXF file. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. project parameters. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. When you create a multi-category schedule. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. These settings are retained within the project template. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. When scheduling. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. click Save As. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Using shared parameters. doors. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. name the file. 5 For each category. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. select Save As. name the file. and click Save. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. For example. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and click Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. 9 Click Save As. windows. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. You can save these mappings to a text file. and they become the set mappings for the project. 8 In the dialog. and click Save. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. and so on. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. name the file. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. 2 For each category.

Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. select a group to add parameters to. select Project parameter. 14 Click Add. 17 Under Discipline. 6 Create as many groups as needed. and select Shared Parameter. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 11 For each parameter group. you may want to save the file to a network location. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. click New. enter a parameter name. click New. and click OK. For each parameter group. 16 Under Parameter Data. 2 Click Create. you can create a list of parameters. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. select a parameter value type. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 22 Click OK. 10 Click OK. project parameters. 3 Name and save the file. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 21 Under Categories. 23 Add project parameters as needed. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 9 Name the parameter. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. because each office has a unique set of needs. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select a parameter discipline type. 19 Under Group parameter under. under Groups. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 5 Enter the group name. for Name. If a file already exists. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. and specify its discipline and type. 25 Click Select. and choose a shared parameter.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 8 Under Parameters. add required parameters. 26 Click OK. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226.

Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 4 Modify the printer settings. 32 Navigate to the directory. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. and make it your default template file. or refer to the online help.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. For each printer. 5 Click Save As. For information on creating multi-category tags. paper placement. select the tag. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 3 Under Settings. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. and click OK. 35 For Name. click Setup. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 37 When you have completed the schedule. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you need only select a setting. 28 Click OK. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. By going first to the Print command. and print. The tag is now part of the template. 6 In the New dialog. for Name. click Schedule/Quantities. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 2 Under Printer. make minor modifications if necessary. Click OK. save the file as a template. click OK. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. By creating named settings within the template. select Multi-Category. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. you create named print settings. and click Open. In this exercise. you can load them into the template. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. enter a name for the schedule. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 34 For Category. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and the percent of actual size.

13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. In addition. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. modify the printer settings. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. If you have a project. and create new settings for this printer. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 24 Navigate to the template location. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. The only remaining task is to save it. and click Open. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and saved them to a template. In addition. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create additional settings as needed. 11 Click Close when finished. 15 Name the template. select it. enter a new name for the printer. 20 Click OK. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. You can also set this template as your default template. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. select a different printer. If you need to share this file with others. 25 Click OK. save it in a network location. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 18 Click Browse. you modified settings. and click Open. 9 In the Print dialog. Your template is complete. click Browse. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 22 Click the File Locations tab. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. In this lesson.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer.rte). By investing the time to individualize your template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. loaded components. 23 For Default template file. click Setup. and click Save. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 10 Repeat these steps as needed. select Template Files (*. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click OK. click Save as. 14 Under Save as type. 19 Select the template.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful